Owner's Manual. Mini Clubman

LINK: CONTENT & A-Z

OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI CLUBMAN.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL. Thank you for choosing a MINI. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI. Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

3 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

NOTES Information...... 6

QUICK REFERENCE Entering...... 16 Set-up and use...... 20 On the road...... 24

AT A GLANCE Cockpit...... 32 Central Information Display (CID)...... 36 Voice activation system...... 44 General settings...... 48 Owner's Manual media...... 60

CONTROLS Opening and closing...... 62 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel...... 84 Transporting children safely...... 96 Driving...... 102 Displays...... 126 Lights...... 148 Safety...... 154 Driving stability control systems...... 178 Driving comfort...... 183 Climate control...... 204

4 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Interior equipment...... 213 Storage compartments...... 224 Cargo area...... 228

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving...... 234 Reducing fuel consumption...... 239

MOBILITY Refueling...... 246 Fuel...... 248 Wheels and tires...... 250 Engine compartment...... 270 Engine oil...... 273 Coolant...... 277 Maintenance...... 279 Replacing components...... 281 Breakdown assistance...... 288 Care...... 296

REFERENCE Technical data...... 302 Appendix...... 305 Everything from A to Z...... 306

© 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English ID5 II/21, 03 21 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

5 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 6

NOTES Information

Information

Using this Owner's Manual Internet Vehicle information and general informa- Orientation tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com. The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index. Integrated Owner's Manual in the An initial overview of the vehicle is pro- vehicle vided in the first chapter. The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically Updates made after the editorial describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual deadline can be displayed on the Control Display. Ad- Due to updates after the editorial deadline, ditional information, refer to page 60. differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's MINI Motorer’s Guide app Manual in the vehicle. The app specifically describes features and Notes on updates can be found in the ap- functions found in the vehicle. The app can pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for be displayed on smartphones and tablets. the vehicle. MINI Motorer’s Guide Web Owner's Manual for Navigation, Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suita- Entertainment, Communication ble information for the selected vehicle. If The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- possible, only equipment and functions that tainment, and Communication can be ob- are actually installed in the vehicle will be tained as a printed book from the service explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis- center. played in any current browser. The topics are also discussed in the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Symbols and displays

Additional sources of informa- Symbols in the Owner's Manual tion Icon Meaning Service center Precautions that must be followed A service center will be glad to answer in order to avoid the possibility of questions at any time. injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle. Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 7

Information NOTES

Icon Meaning This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. "..." Control Display texts used to select When using these functions and systems, individual functions. the applicable laws and regulations must be ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the observed. voice activation system. For any options and equipment not descri- ››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to the activation system. Supplementary Owner's Manuals. Your dealer’s service center is happy to an- Action steps swer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to Action steps to be carried out are presented your vehicle. as a numbered list. The steps must be carried out in the defined order. 1. First action step. Status of the Owner's Manual 2. Second action step. Basic information Enumerations The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a Enumerations without mandatory order or policy of constant development that is con- alternative possibilities are presented as a ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue list with bullet points. to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea- – First possibility. tures described in this Owner's Manual may – Second possibility. differ from those in your vehicle. Icons on vehicle components Updates made after the editorial This symbol on a vehicle component deadline indicates that further information on the Due to updates after the editorial deadline, component is available in the Owner's differences may exist between the printed Manual. Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Notes on updates can be found in the ap- Vehicle features and options pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the For Your Own Safety model series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates features and functions that are not available in Manufacturer a vehicle, for example because of the se- The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri- lected optional features or the country-spe- sche Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, cific version. BMW AG.

7 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 8

NOTES Information

Intended use If work is performed improperly, for in- Heed the following when using the vehicle: stance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent damage and related – Owner's Manual. safety risks. – Information on the vehicle. Do not re- Improperly performed work on the vehicle move stickers. paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of – Technical vehicle data. components, e.g., the radar sensors, and – The traffic, speed, and safety laws where thereby result in a safety risk. the vehicle is driven. – Vehicle documents and statutory docu- Parts and accessories ments. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends the use of parts and accessory prod- Warranty ucts approved by the manufacturer of the MINI. Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration Approved parts and accessories, and advice requirements applying in the country of on their use and installation are available first delivery, also known as homologation. from a MINI dealer's service center. If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ- MINI parts and accessories were tested by ent country it might be necessary to adapt the manufacturer of the MINI for their your vehicle to potentially differing operat- safety and suitability in MINI vehicles. ing conditions and registration require- The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants ments. If your vehicle does not comply with genuine MINI parts and accessories. the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge war- The manufacturer of your vehicle does not ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further evaluate whether each individual product information on warranty is available from a from another manufacturer can be used service center. with MINI vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific official approval was issued. The manufac- Maintenance and repairs turer of your vehicle does not evaluate Advanced technology, for instance the use whether these products are suitable for of modern materials and high-performance MINI vehicles under all usage conditions. electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work. California Proposition 65 Warning The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- For vehicles sold in California, the law re- mends that you entrust corresponding pro- quires vehicle manufacturers to provide the cedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. If following warning: you choose to use another service facility, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends use of a facility that performs work, Warning e.g., maintenance and repair, according to Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au- MINI specifications with properly trained tomobile components and parts, including personnel, referred to in the Owner's components found in the interior furnish- Manual as "another qualified service center ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi- or repair shop". cals known to the State of California to

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 9

Information NOTES

cause cancer and birth defects and repro- – Federal Emissions System Defect War- ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids ranty. contained in vehicles and certain products – Federal Emissions Performance War- of component wear contain or emit chemi- ranty. cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other re- – California Emission Control System Lim- productive harm. Battery posts, terminals ited Warranty. and related accessories contain lead and Detailed information about these warranties lead compounds. Batteries also contain is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor- other chemicals known to the State of Cali- mation Booklet for US models or in the War- fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana- after handling. Used engine oil contains dian models. chemicals that have caused cancer in labo- Your vehicle has been specifically adapted ratory animals. Always protect your skin and designed to meet the particular operat- by washing thoroughly with soap and wa- ing conditions and homologation require- ter. For more information go to ments in your country and continental re- www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve- gion in order to deliver the full driving hicle. pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, Warning you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating con- Operating, servicing and maintaining a ditions and homologation requirements. passenger vehicle or off-highway motor You should also be aware of any applicable vehicle can expose you to chemicals in- warranty limitations or exclusions for such cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, country or region. In such case, please con- phthalates, and lead, which are known to tact Customer Relations for further informa- the State of California to cause cancer and tion. birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as Maintenance necessary, service your vehicle in a well- Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain ventilated area and wear gloves or wash the road safety, operational reliability and your hands frequently when servicing the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. your vehicle. For more information go to Specifications for maintenance measures: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve- – MINI Maintenance system. hicle. – Service and Warranty Information Book- let for US models. Service and warranty – Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for We recommend that you read this publica- Canadian models. tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by If the vehicle is not maintained or is im- the following warranties: properly maintained, this could result in se- – New Vehicle Limited Warranty. rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim- – Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. ited Warranty.

9 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 10

NOTES Information

Refer to section on engine oil change re- – Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, garding recommended service intervals for rain sensor signals. oil changes. The processed data is only processed in the vehicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not stored beyond the operating pe- Data memory riod. Electronic components, e.g. control units General information and ignition keys, contain components for Electronic control devices are installed in storing technical information. Information the vehicle. Electronic control units process about the vehicle condition, component us- data they receive from vehicle sensors, self- age, maintenance recommendations, events generate or exchange with each other. Some or faults can be stored temporarily or per- control units are necessary for the vehicle manently. to function safely or provide assistance dur- This information generally records the state ing driving, for instance driver assistance of a component, a module, a system, or the systems. Furthermore, control units facili- environment, for instance: tate comfort or infotainment functions. – Operating states of system components, Information about stored or exchanged data for instance, fill levels, tire inflation can be requested from the manufacturer of pressure, battery status. the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam- – Malfunctions and faults in important ple. system components, for instance lights and brakes. Personal reference – Responses by the vehicle to special sit- Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi- uations such as airbag deployment or cle identification number. Depending on the engagement of the driving stability con- country, the vehicle owner can be identified trol systems. with the vehicle identification number, li- – Information on vehicle-damaging cense plate and corresponding authorities. events. In addition, there are other options to track The data is required to perform the control data collected in the vehicle to the driver or unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves vehicle owner, for instance via utilized to recognize and correct malfunctions, and services. helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions. Operating data in the vehicle The majority of this data is stored tempora- Control units process data to operate the ve- rily and is only processed within the vehicle hicle. itself. In some circumstances the vehicle For example, this includes: may store some data for an additional but – Status messages for the vehicle and its limited period of time. individual components, e.g., wheel rota- When servicing, for instance during repairs, tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration, service processes, warranty cases, and qual- lateral acceleration, engaged safety belt ity assurance measures, this technical infor- indicator. mation can be read out from the vehicle to-

10 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 11

Information NOTES

gether with the vehicle identification – Data on the use of Internet services. number. This data can be stored locally in the vehicle A dealer’s service center or another quali- or is found on a device that has been con- fied service center or repair shop can read nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, out the information. The socket for OBD On- USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is board Diagnosis required by law in the ve- stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at hicle is used to read out the data. any time. The data is collected, processed, and used This data is only transmitted to third parties by the relevant organizations in the service upon personal request as part of the use of network. The data documents technical con- online services. The transmission depends ditions of the vehicle, which can be used to on the selected settings for the use of the determine vehicle maintenance status, and services. facilitate quality improvement. Fault and event memories in the vehicle can Incorporation of mobile devices be reset when a dealer’s service center or Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo- another qualified service center or repair bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in- shop performs repair or servicing work. stance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle control elements. Data entry and data transfer into The sound and picture from the mobile de- the vehicle vice can be played back and displayed through the multimedia system. Certain in- General information formation is transferred to the mobile de- Depending on the vehicle equipment, com- vice at the same time. Depending on the fort and individual settings can be stored in type of incorporation, this includes, for in- the vehicle and modified or reset at any stance position data and other general vehi- time. cle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance navigation For example, this includes: or music playback, work. – Settings for the seat and steering wheel There is no further interaction between the positions. mobile device and the vehicle, such as ac- – Chassis and climate control settings. tive access to vehicle data. If necessary, data can be transferred to the How the data will be processed further is entertainment and communication system determined by the provider of the particular of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone. app being used. The extent of the possible This includes the following depending on settings depends on the respective app and the respective equipment: the operating system of the mobile device. – Multimedia data such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated Services multimedia system. – Address book data for use in conjunc- General information tion with an integrated hands-free sys- If the vehicle has a wireless network con- tem or an integrated navigation system. nection, this enables data to be exchanged – Entered navigation destinations. between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is realized via

11 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 12

NOTES Information

an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit Event Data Recorder EDR or via personal mobile devices brought into the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This wireless network connection enables 'online This vehicle is equipped with an event data functions' to be used. These include online recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR services and apps supplied by the vehicle is to record, in certain crash or near crash- manufacturer or by other providers. like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that Services from the vehicle will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to manufacturer record data related to vehicle dynamics and Where online services from the vehicle safety systems for a short period of time, manufacturer are concerned, the corre- typically 30 seconds or less. sponding functions are described in the ap- The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re- propriate place, for instance the Owner's cord such data as: Manual or manufacturer's website. The relevant legal information pertaining to data – How various systems in your vehicle protection may also be found on the manu- were operating. facturer’s website. Personal data may be – Whether or not the driver and passen- used to perform online services. Data is ex- ger safety belts were fastened. changed over a secure connection, for in- – How far, if at all, the driver was depress- stance with the IT systems of the vehicle ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal. manufacturer intended for this purpose. – How fast the vehicle was traveling. Any collection, processing, and use of per- This data can help provide a better under- sonal data above and beyond that needed to standing of the circumstances in which provide the services must always be based crashes and injuries occur. on a legal permission, contractual arrange- ment or consent. It is also possible to acti- EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if vate or deactivate the data connection as a a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data whole. That is, with the exception of func- is recorded by the EDR under normal driv- tions and services required by law such as ing conditions and no personal data, for in- Assist systems. stance name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. Services from other providers However, other parties, such as law enforce- When using online services from other pro- ment, could combine the EDR data with the viders, these services are the responsibility type of personally identifying data routinely of the relevant provider and subject to their acquired during a crash investigation. data privacy conditions and terms of use. To read data recorded by an EDR, special The vehicle manufacturer has no influence equipment is required, and access to the ve- on the content exchanged during this proc- hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to ess. Information on the way in which per- the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, sonal data is collected and used in relation such as law enforcement, that have the spe- to services from third parties, the scope of cial equipment, can read the information if such data, and its purpose, can be obtained they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. from the relevant service provider.

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 13

Information NOTES

Vehicle identification number

General information Depending on the national-market version, the vehicle identification number is located in different positions in the vehicle. This chapter describes all possible positions for the series. The vehicle identification number can be Engine compartment found on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Left nameplate For 3-door models:

The engraved vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Right nameplate The vehicle identification number can be For 3-door models: found on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the vehicle. For 5-door models:

The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of the vehicle. The vehicle identification number can be For 5-door models: found on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the vehicle.

13 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 14

NOTES Information

Windshield other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety. The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately in- form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti- fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra- tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 15

Information NOTES

15 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 16

QUICK REFERENCE Entering

Entering

Opening and closing Buttons for the central locking system Buttons on the vehicle key Overview

1 Unlocking Buttons for the central locking system. 2 Locking 3 Open split doors Locking 4 Panic mode Pressing the button locks the vehicle if the front doors are closed. Unlocking the vehicle Press the button on the vehicle key. Unlocking Pressing the button unlocks the ve- Depending on the settings, either only the hicle. driver's door or all vehicle access points are unlocked. Panic mode If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to un- You can trigger the alarm system if you find lock the other vehicle access points. yourself in a dangerous situation. Press the button on the vehicle key Press and hold the button on the ve- and hold for at least 3 seconds. hicle key after unlocking. To switch off the alarm: press any button. The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle Comfort Access key is pressed. Concept Locking the vehicle The vehicle can be accessed without operat- Press the button on the vehicle key. ing the vehicle key. Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in All vehicle access points are locked. your pants pocket, is sufficient.

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 17

Entering QUICK REFERENCE

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi- 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di- cle key when it is in close proximity or in rection of travel and immediately pull it the car's interior. back.

Unlocking the vehicle

Split Doors On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button. Opening

Locking the vehicle

– Unlock the vehicle and use the button in the handle to completely open first the right side, arrow 1, and then the left side On the driver's or front passenger's door of the split doors, arrow 2. handle, press the button. – Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second Opening the split doors with no-touch to open the right side of the split activation doors. Press and hold the button on the vehicle Concept key again for approx. 1 second to open The split doors can be opened with no-touch the left side of the split doors. activation using the vehicle key you are car- Depending on the setting, the doors may be rying. unlocked.

Performing the foot movement Closing 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle Closing the split doors manually. at approx. one arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle.

17 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 18

QUICK REFERENCE Entering

Displays and control elements All around the selector lever

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Selector lever 2 Controller with buttons 3 Parking brake 1 Low beams, fog lights 2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig- Central Information Display (CID) nal 3 Instrument cluster Concept 4 Wiper system The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated Indicator/warning lights via the Controller. The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Buttons on the Controller Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when Button Function the engine is started or the ignition is Press once: calls up the main switched on. menu. Press twice: displays all menu Driver's door items of the main menu. Goes to the Communication menu. Goes to the Media/Radio menu.

Goes to destination input menu for navigation. Goes to navigation map. 1 Safety switch 2 Power windows 3 Exterior mirrors

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 19

Entering QUICK REFERENCE

Button Function Press once: opens the previous display. Press and hold: open the menus used last. Goes to the Options menu.

Voice control

Activating the voice control system

Press the button on the steering wheel. Wait for the signal. Say the command. This icon indicates that the voice control system is active. If no other commands are available, operate the function via the Central Information Display (CID).

Terminating the voice control system Press the button on the steering wheel or ›Cancel‹.

19 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 20

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors and steering Adjusting the head restraint wheel Height Manually adjustable seats

– To raise: push the head restraint up. – To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and 1 Forward/backward push the head restraint down. 2 Thigh support 3 Height Adjusting the exterior mirrors 4 Backrest tilt

Electrically adjustable seats

1 Adjusting 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon- itor 1 Memory function 3 Folding in and out 2 Lumbar support 3 Backrest tilt 4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 21

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE

Adjusting the steering wheel Press the desired button 1 or 2. The procedure stops when a seat setting In four directions switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed. Once underway, adjustment of the seat position on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.

Infotainment

Radio 1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer- Buttons and functions red height and angle to suit your seat Depending on the country and equipment position. version, the radio has the following buttons. 3. Fold the lever back up. Button Function Press: switches sound output on/ Memory function off. Concept Turn: adjusts the volume. The following settings can be stored and, if Change the entertainment necessary, retrieved using the memory source. function: Press once: changes the station/ – Seat position. track. – Exterior mirror position. Press and hold: fast forward/ – Height of the Head-up Display. rewind the track. Programmable memory buttons. Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. Changing the waveband/satellite 2. Set the desired position. radio.

3. Press the button. The LED in the Navigation destination input button lights up. 4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 on the Entering a destination via address seat while the LED is illuminated. The LED goes out. State/province Calling up settings 1. "Navigation" The stored position is called up automati- 2. "Enter address" cally.

21 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 22

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

3. "State/Province?" 5. Select the functions for which the mo- 4. Select the country from the list. bile phone is to be used. 6. To perform additional steps on the mo- Entering the address bile phone, refer to the operating in- The address can be entered in any order. structions for the mobile phone: for instance search for or connect the Example: entering the address via the town/ Bluetooth device or a new device. city The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- 1. "City/Postal code?" pears on the mobile phone display. Se- 2. Enter the town/city. lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle. The list is narrowed down further with 7. Depending on the mobile device, a con- each entry. trol number is displayed or the control number must be entered. 3. Select the icon. – Compare the control number dis- 4. Select a town/city from the list. played on the Control Display with 5. If necessary, enter the street. the control number on the display of 6. Select the street as you would the town/ the device. Confirm the control num- city. ber on the device and on the Control Display. 7. If necessary, enter a house number. – Enter and confirm the same control 8. Select the icon. number on the device and via the 9. Select a house number or range of house Central Information Display (CID). numbers from the list. The device is connected and displayed in the device list. Starting destination guidance The mobile phone is connected and will ap- "Start guidance" pear at the top of the list of mobile phones. Destination guidance is started to the town/ city center if no street is entered. Using the telephone Pairing the mobile phone Accepting a call After the mobile phone is paired once with Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen- the vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper- tral Information Display (CID) or the button ated using the Central Information Display on the steering wheel. (CID), the steering wheel buttons and spoken instructions. Via the Central Information Display (CID) "Accept" 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" Via the button on the steering wheel 3. "Mobile devices" Press the button. 4. "Connect new device" Via the instrument cluster The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display. Use the OK button on the steering wheel to select: "Accept"

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 23

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE

Dialing a number Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay 1. "Communication" Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle. 2. "Dial number" Select CarPlay as the function: 3. Select the numbers individually. "Apple CarPlay" 4. Select the icon. The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list. Establish the connection via the additional telephone:

1. Press the button. 2. "Call via"

Apple CarPlay preparation

Concept CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information Display (CID).

Functional requirements – Compatible iPhone: iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. – Corresponding mobile contract. – Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice operation are activated on the iPhone. – If necessary, the setting for mobile data must be activated on the iPhone. – WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehicle.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. Select the following settings: – "Bluetooth®" – "Apple CarPlay"

23 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 24

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

On the road

Driving 3. Press the Start/Stop button. Manual transmission: switching off Starting and stopping the engine 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press Ignition on/off the Start/Stop button. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. – On: press the Start/Stop button. 3. Set the parking brake. Most of the indicator/ Auto Start/Stop function warning lights light up for a varied length of time. Steptronic transmission: switches the engine off automatically while stationary to – Off: press the Start/Stop button again. save fuel. The engine starts automatically All indicator lights go out. when the brake pedal is released. – Radio-ready state: when the ignition is Manual transmission: switches the engine switched off, press the ON/OFF button off automatically while stationary to save on the radio or when the engine is run- fuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is de- ning, press the Start/Stop button. pressed, the engine starts automatically. Some electrical consumers remain ready for operation. Parking brake

Start/stop engine Set the electrical parking brake Pull the switch when the vehicle is Steptronic transmission: starting stationary. 1. Depress the brake pedal. The LED and indicator light light up. 2. Engage selector lever position P or N. Releasing 3. Press the Start/Stop button. Manual transmission: press the switch while the brake pedal is pressed. Manual transmission: starting Steptronic transmission: press the switch 1. Depress the brake pedal. while the brake is pressed or selector lever 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to position P is set. neutral. The LED and indicator light go out. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The parking brake is released. Steptronic transmission: switching off 1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the parking brake. 2. Engage selector lever position P.

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 25

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Manual transmission Steptronic transmission, Sport and manual mode Shifting When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push the gearshift lever to the right in order to prevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear.

Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. To overcome the resistance push the gearshift lever dynamically to the left and en- Sport program: gage reverse gear with a forward shifting Press the selector lever to the left from se- movement. lector lever position D. Steptronic transmission Manual mode: – To shift down: press the selector lever Selector lever positions forward. Parking position P. – To shift up: pull the selector lever rear- wards. R is reverse. Neutral N. Turn signal, high beams, headlight Gear position D. flasher, roadside parking lights Engage selector lever position P or R only when the vehicle is stationary. Turn signal To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear position or reverse, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Selector lever lock A lock prevents an inadvertent change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position and, depending on the transmission version, inadvertent switching to selector lever position P or R. – On: press the lever past the resistance To release the lock: with the brake pedal de- point. pressed, press the button on the side of the – Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist- selector lever. ance point. – Off: press the lever past the resistance point in the opposite direction. – Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the lever up or down.

25 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 26

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

– Brief signaling: press the lever to the re- Lights and lighting sistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash. Light functions

High beams, headlight flasher Icon Function Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control. Cornering light. Lights off. Daytime running lights. Parking lights. Press the lever forward or pull it backward. – High beams on, arrow 1. The high beams light up when the low Low beams. beams are switched on. – High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. Instrument lighting.

Canada: roadside parking light Wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

To illuminate the vehicle on one side. – On: with the radio-ready state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. – Off: briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction. Press the lever up until the desired position is reached. – Resting position of the wipers: position 0.

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 27

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

– Rain sensor: position 1. Set interval or sensitivity of the rain – Normal wiper speed: position 2. sensor – Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Switching off and brief wipe

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield Press the lever down. – Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position. – Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

To activate: press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1. To deactivate: press the lever back into the standard position.

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point.

27 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 28

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

– Normal wiper speed: tap up once. Set interval or sensitivity of the rain – Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap sensor once beyond the resistance point.

Switching off and brief wipe

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield Press the lever down. – To switch off fast wipe: press down twice. – To switch off normal wipe: press down once. – Brief wipe: press down once.

Rain sensor Pull the lever. Activating/deactivating

Climate control

Air conditioner

Button Function Temperature.

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Air conditioning.

Air recirculation mode.

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 29

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Button Function Button Function Controls the air flow, Windshield defroster. manual. Rear window defroster.

Controls the air distribution manually. Refueling stop

Refueling

Windshield defroster. Fuel cap 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the Automatic climate control rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens. Button Function Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at- AUTO program. tached to the fuel filler flap.

Automatic air recirculation Gasoline control AUC/recirculated- For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline air mode. should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur Controls the air flow, content. manual. Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without metallic additives. Information on the recommended fuel grade can be found in the Owner's Manual. Air distribution, manual.

Defrosts and defogs the windows.

29 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 30

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

Wheels and tires Adding engine oil

Tire inflation pressure specifications General information Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehicle before engine oil is added.

Adding engine oil

The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressure Regularly check the tire inflation pressure Only add engine oil when the message is and correct it as needed: displayed in the instrument cluster. – At least twice a month. Observe the quantity to be added in the – Before embarking on an extended trip. message. Take care not to add too much engine oil. After correcting the tire inflation Observe recommended engine oil types. pressure Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor. Providing assistance

Electronic oil measurement Hazard warning flashers

Requirements A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" The button is located above the Control Dis- play. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level" The engine oil level is displayed.

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 31

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Breakdown assistance

MINI Roadside Assistance This service can be reached around the clock in many countries. 1. "MINI Connected" 2. "MINI Assist" 3. "MINI Roadside Assistance" The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis- tance is established. A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

31 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 32

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

Cockpit

Vehicle features and options in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. This chapter describes all standard, country- When using these functions and systems, specific and optional features offered with the applicable laws and regulations must be the series. It also describes features and observed. functions that are not necessarily available

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 79 Lights off 2 Exterior mirror operation 92 Daytime running lights 150 3 Buttons of the central locking sys- Parking lights 148 tem 68 4 Lights Low beams 148 Front fog lights 151

Light switch 148

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 33

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

Automatic headlight con- Roadside parking lights 149 trol 149 Cornering light 150 Trip computer 139 High-beam Assistant 150 Instrument lighting 152 7 Instrument cluster 126 8 Steering column stalk, right 5 Steering wheel buttons, left Wipers 110 Camera-based cruise control Wiper on Canadian mod- on/off 183 els 114 Cruise control on/off 190 Rain sensor 111 Rain sensor on Canadian models 115 Speed Limiter 174 Cleaning windows 112

Pausing, continuing cruise control Rear window wiper in Cana- dian models 112 Cruise control: increase speed Rear window wiper 112

Cruise control: reduce speed Clean the rear window 112

Camera-based cruise control: reduce distance 9 Steering wheel buttons, right Camera-based cruise control: Voice control 44 increase distance Telephone 6 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal 110 Confirm the selection 138

High beams, headlight flasher 110 Move selection up 138 High-beam Assistant 150 Move selection down 138

33 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 34

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

Increase volume 11 Heated steering wheel 94 12 Adjusting the steering wheel 94 Reduce volume 13 Unlocking the hood 271 14 Depending on the equipment: using tailgate 10 Horn, entire surface

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system 288 6 PDC Park Distance Con- trol 193 Rearview camera 196 Intelligent Safety 165 Parking assistant 199 Auto Start/Stop func- 2 Control Display 36 tion 105 3 Radio/Multimedia Start/stop the engine and 4 Glove compartment 224 switch the ignition on/ 5 Climate control 204 off 102

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 35

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 8 Controller with buttons 39 178 9 Parking brake 108 MINI Driving Modes switch 180

7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 119 Manual transmission gearshift lever 118

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Call, SOS 289 4 Ambient light 152

2 Indicator light, front-seat pas- 5 Panoramic glass sunroof 81 senger airbag 157

3 Reading lights 152 6 Interior lights 152

35 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 36

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options Input and display

This chapter describes all standard, country- Main menu specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and General information functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- The main menu is divided into two areas. tions or country versions. This also applies The left area contains menu items that can to safety-related functions and systems. be used to call up all functions from the on- When using these functions and systems, board monitor. The menu items in the right the applicable laws and regulations must be area show dynamic contents that enable observed. quick access to certain functions.

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Safety information Media/Radio All functions for the entertainment system, for instance radio stations or pairing with external devices. Warning Operating the integrated information sys- Communication tems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- Telephone and message function, e-mail and sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is calendar and also pairing and managing mo- a risk of accident. Only use the systems or bile devices, for instance smartphones. devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems Navigation and devices while the vehicle is stationary. Access to the navigation system, destination input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map views and other functions, such as Points of Interest.

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 37

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

My MINI – Destination search: place names can be Information on the vehicle status and avail- entered in all languages that are availa- able settings for vehicle and on-board moni- ble on the Control Display. tor. Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual. Activating/deactivating the functions MINI Connected Several menu items are preceded by a Access to apps and vehicle functions. Addi- checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether tional apps and vehicle functions can be the function is activated or deactivated. Se- purchased from the MINI Connected Store. lecting the menu item activates or deacti- vates the function. Messages Function is activated. Access to all incoming messages in the ve- Function is deactivated. hicle, for instance Check Control messages. Status information Letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be- General information tween entering upper and lower case let- The status field can be found in the upper ters, numbers and characters: area of the Control Display. Status informa- Icon Function tion is displayed in the form of symbols. Change between capital and Radio lower-case letters. Insert blank space. Icon Meaning Use voice control. HD Radio station is being received. Confirm entry. Satellite radio is switched on. Without navigation system Telephone Select the icon. Icon Meaning Entry comparison Incoming or outgoing call. When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter Missed call. entered and letters may be added automatically. Signal strength of cellular network. Entries are continuously compared with Symbol flashes: network search. data stored in the vehicle. Cellular network is not available. – Only those letters are offered during en- Roaming is active. try for which data is available. SMS text message received. Message received.

37 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 38

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Icon Meaning Selecting the display The display can be selected in menus which Reminder. support the split screen function. Sending not possible. 1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected. Entertainment 2. Press the Controller. Icon Meaning 3. Select the desired setting.

Bluetooth audio. Specifying the number of displays USB audio interface. It is possible to specify the number of dis- Mobile phone audio interface. plays. Apple CarPlay. 1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected. Other symbols 2. Press the Controller. 3. "Personalize menu" Icon Meaning 4. Select the desired setting. Check Control message. 5. Tilt the Controller to the left. The sound output has been switched off. Control elements Encrypted connection not active. Request for the current vehicle po- Overview sition. Checking the current vehicle position.

Split screen

General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, for instance information from the trip computer. 1 Control Display with touchscreen In the divided screen view, the so-called 2 Controller with buttons split screen, this information remains visible even when switching to another menu. Control Display Switching the split screen on/off General information 1. Press the button. To clean the Control Display, follow the care 2. "Split screen" instructions, refer to page 299.

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 39

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

In the case of very high temperatures on Controller the Control Display, for instance due to intense solar radiation, the brightness may be General information reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, for in- The buttons can be used to open the menus stance through shade or air conditioning, directly. The Controller can be used to se- the normal functions are restored. lect menu items and enter the settings.

Safety information Operation – Turn to switch between menu items, for example. NOTICE Objects in the area in the front of the Con- trol Display can shift and damage the Con- trol Display. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Display.

Switching on/off automatically The Control Display is switched on automat- – Press to select a menu item, for example. ically when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the Control Display is needed for operation. In certain situations, the Control Display is switched off automatically, for instance if no operation is performed on the vehicle for several minutes.

Switching on/off manually The Control Display can also be switched off – With navigation system: tilt in four di- manually. rections to switch between displays, for example. 1. Press the button. 2. "Turn off control display" Press the Controller or any button on the Controller to switch it back on again.

39 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 40

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

– Without navigation system: tilt in two Operating via the Controller directions to switch between displays, for example. Opening the main menu Press the button.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function The main menu is displayed. Press once: calls up the main All Central Information Display (CID) func- menu. tions can be called up via the main menu. Press twice: displays all menu items of the main menu. Adjusting the main menu With navigation system: opens the Communication menu. 1. Press the button twice. All menu items of the main menu are With navigation system: opens displayed. the Media/Radio menu. 2. Select a menu item. Without navigation system: open 3. To move the menu item to the desired the Audio menu. position, tilt the Controller to the right Without navigation system: or left. opens the Telephone menu. With navigation system: opens Selecting menu items destination input menu for navi- Highlighted menu items can be selected. gation. 1. Turn the Controller until the desired With navigation system: opens menu item is highlighted. navigation map. 2. Press the Controller. Press once: opens the previous display. Adjusting menu contents Press and hold: open the menus The display of menus "Media/Radio", used last. "Communication" and "MINI Connected" can be adjusted, for instance to remove the en- Goes to the Options menu. tries of functions that are not used from the menu.

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 41

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Via the Central Information Display (CID): The "Options" menu is displayed. 1. Select the menu. The menu consists of various areas, for instance: 2. "Personalize menu" – "Split screen": screen settings. 3. Select desired menu contents to be dis- – "Media/Radio": control options for the played. selected main menu. Dynamic contents – "Save station": if applicable, further control options for the selected menu. You can display dynamic contents within the menu items. The contents of the menu Entering letters and numbers items update automatically, e.g., the active destination guidance in the navigation. Input Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. Turn the Controller: select letters or 1. "My MINI" numbers. 2. "Contents of main menu" 2. : confirm entry.

Changing between displays Deleting After a menu item is selected, for instance "System settings", a new display appears. Icon Function – Tilt the Controller to the left. Press the Controller: delete The current display closes and the previ- letters or number. ous display is shown. or Hold the Controller down: delete all letters or numbers. – Press the button. The previous display re-opens. Using alphabetical lists – Tilt the Controller to the right. For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en- The new display opens. tries, the letters for which there is an entry An arrow indicates that additional displays are displayed at the left edge. can be opened. 1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly. Opening recently used menus All letters for which there are entries The recently used menus can be displayed. are displayed on the left edge. Press and hold this button. 2. Select the first letter of the desired en- The recently used menus are dis- try. played. The first entry of the selected letter is displayed. Going to the Options menu Press the button.

41 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 42

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Operation via touchscreen Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, a new display General information opens. The Control Display is equipped with a An arrow indicates that additional displays touchscreen. can be opened. Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not – Swipe to the left. use any objects. – Tap arrow. The new display opens. Opening the main menu Tap on the icon. Entering letters and numbers

Input 1. Tap the icon on the touchscreen. A keyboard is displayed on the Control Display. 2. Enter desired letters and numbers.

Deleting

The main menu is displayed. Icon Function All Central Information Display (CID) func- Tapping the icon: deletes the letter tions can be called up via the main menu. or number. Adjusting the main menu Tapping and holding the icon all letters: deletes all letters or num- 1. Tap on the icon. bers. 2. Drag the menu item to the desired position on the right or left. Operating navigation map Selecting menu items The navigation map can be moved using the touchscreen. Tap the desired menu item. Function Operation Dynamic contents Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the You can display dynamic contents within map. fingers. the menu items. The contents of the menu items update automatically, e.g., the active destination guidance in the navigation. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Contents of main menu"

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 43

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Programmable memory buttons

General information The Central Information Display (CID) functions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly, for instance radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and menu entries. Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used. Storing a function 1. Select the function via the Central Infor- mation Display (CID).

2. Press and hold the desired button, until a signal sounds.

Executing a function Press the button. The function will work immediately. This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The assignment of the buttons is displayed in the upper area of the Control Display. Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds. 2. "OK"

43 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 44

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options activation system. To set the language, refer to page 48. This chapter describes all standard, country- – Always say commands in the language specific and optional features offered with of the voice activation system. the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Using the voice activation sys- tions or country versions. This also applies tem to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be Activating the voice control system observed. Press the button on the steering wheel. Concept Wait for the signal. Say the command. Most functions displayed on the Control This icon indicates that the voice con- Display can be operated by voice commands trol system is active. via the voice activation system. The system No other commands may be available. In supports you with announcements during this case, operate the function via the Cen- input. tral Information Display (CID). Terminating the voice control General information system Press the button on the steering – Functions that can only be used when wheel or ›Cancel‹. the vehicle is stationary can only be operated via the voice activation system to a limited extent. – The system uses a special microphone Possible commands on the driver's side. – ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver- General information bal instructions to use with the voice ac- Most menu items on the Control Display can tivation system. be spoken as commands. Commands from other menus can also be Functional requirements spoken. You can also select list entries such as phone list entries via voice activation. Read – A language must be set via the Control Display that is supported by the voice

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 45

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

these list entries out loud exactly as they Settings are shown in the respective list. Displaying possible commands Setting the voice control The following is displayed in the top area of You can set the system to use standard dia- the Control Display: log or a short version. – Some possible commands for the current The short version of the voice control plays menu. back short messages in abbreviated form. – Some possible commands from other Via the Central Information Display (CID): menus. 1. "My MINI" – Status of the voice recognition. 2. "System settings" – Encrypted connection is not availa- 3. "Language" ble. 4. "Speech mode:" Help on the voice activation system 5. Select the desired setting. – ›General information on voice control‹: have information on the operating prin- Activating voice recognition via ciple of the voice activation system read the server out loud. The voice recognition feature via the server – ›Help‹: have help for the current menu provides a dictation function and a natural read out loud. method of destination input while improv- ing the quality of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is transmitted to a serv- Example: going to the sound ice provider via an encrypted connection settings and stored locally there. Via the Central Information Display (CID): The commands of the menu items are spo- 1. "My MINI" ken just as they are selected via the Con- 2. "System settings" troller. 3. "Language" 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if needed. 4. "Server speech recognition"

2. Press the button on the steering Adjusting the volume wheel. Turn the volume button during the spoken 3. ›Media and radio‹ instructions until the desired volume is set. 4. ›Tone‹ – The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed. – The volume is stored for the profile currently used.

45 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 46

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

Information on Emergency If it was not possible to activate voice command response, the list of Bluetooth devices Requests appears on the Control Display.

Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful Voice assistants from third- situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the es- party providers tablishment of a telephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to Concept page 289, close to the interior mirror. Some third-party providers provide digital voice assistants. Supported voice assistants can be used in the vehicle. System limits General information – Certain noises can be detected and may Some of the functions are limited in the ve- lead to problems. Keep the doors, win- hicle to prevent any impairment of safety dows, and glass sunroof closed. while driving. – Noises from the front passenger or the rear seat bench can impair the system. Functional requirements Avoid making other noise in the vehicle – If applicable, corresponding Connected while speaking. Service subsequently purchased via – Major language dialects can cause prob- MINI Connected Store. lems with the voice recognition feature. – Vehicle added in the MINI app. Speak loud and clear. – Third-party provider account and MINI account connected in the MINI app. Using the voice activation sys- – Smartphone connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth audio. tem of the smartphone Activation in the MINI app A smartphone connected to the vehicle can Third-party assistants are set up in the be used via voice control. MINI app. Activate voice command response on the Follow the instructions in the app. smartphone for this purpose. Activation in the vehicle 1. Press and hold the button on the steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. 1. Press the button on the steering Voice command response is activated on wheel. the smartphone. 2. Wait for the signal. 2. Release the button. 3. Say the specific activation word of the third-party provider and the desired If activation is successful, a confirma- command. tion appears on the Control Display.

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 47

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

Information about the active function is displayed on the Control Display. Malfunction In case of a malfunction, switch off the engine and start the engine again.

47 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 48

AT A GLANCE General settings

General settings

Vehicle features and options The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with Setting the time the series. It also describes features and Via the Central Information Display (CID): functions that are not necessarily available 1. "My MINI" in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies 2. "System settings" to safety-related functions and systems. 3. "Date and time" When using these functions and systems, 4. "Time:" the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. 5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed. 6. Press the Controller. Language 7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes are displayed. Setting the language 8. Press the Controller. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Setting the time format 1. "My MINI" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 2. "System settings" 3. If necessary, "Language" 1. "My MINI" 4. "Language:" 2. "System settings" 5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Date and time" The setting is stored for the driver profile 4. "Time format:" currently used. 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used. Time

Setting the time zone Date Via the Central Information Display (CID): Setting the date 1. "My MINI" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" 1. "My MINI" 4. "Time zone:" 2. "System settings" 5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Date and time"

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 49

General settings AT A GLANCE

4. "Date:" Activating/deactivating the 5. Turn the Controller until the desired day display of the current vehicle is displayed. position 6. Press the Controller. 7. Make the settings for the month and Concept year. If vehicle tracking has been activated, the Setting the date format current vehicle position can be displayed in the MINI Connected app. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" Activating/deactivating 2. "System settings" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 3. "Date and time" 1. "My MINI" 4. "Date format:" 2. "Vehicle settings" 5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Data privacy" The setting is stored for the driver profile 4. "Vehicle tracking" currently used. 5. Select the desired setting.

Setting the units of measure- Activating/deactivating pop- ment ups

You can set the units of measurement for For some functions, pop-ups are displayed some values, for example, consumption, dis- automatically on the Control Display. Some tances and temperature. of these pop-ups can be activated or deacti- Via the Central Information Display (CID): vated. 1. "My MINI" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 2. "System settings" 1. "My MINI" 3. "Units" 2. "System settings" 4. Select the desired menu item. 3. "Pop-ups" 5. Select the desired setting. 4. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used. currently used.

Control Display

Brightness Via the Central Information Display (CID):

49 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 50

AT A GLANCE General settings

1. "My MINI" General information 2. "System settings" The setting of the color world effects the following display content: 3. "Displays" – On-board monitor. 4. "Control display" – Instrument cluster. 5. "Brightness at night" – Head-up Display. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired Depending on the equipment, the color brightness is set. world can be applied as basic display for the 7. Press the Controller. LED ring on the central instrument. The setting is stored for the driver profile LED ring on the central instrument cluster, currently used. refer to page 143. Depending on the light conditions, the brightness settings may not be clearly visi- Setting the color world ble. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Screensaver 1. "My MINI" If no entries are made via the Central Infor- 2. "System settings" mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be 3. "Displays" displayed after an adjustable time. 4. "Color scheme" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 5. Select the desired setting. 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" Messages 4. "Control display" Concept 5. "Screensaver" The menu centrally displays all messages ar- 6. Select the desired setting. riving in the vehicle in list form. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used. General information The following messages can be displayed: Instrument cluster with en- – Traffic messages. – Communication messages, for example hanced features: color world e-mails, SMS text messages or reminders. Concept – Check Control messages. The display of the display content can be – Messages on service notifications. configured individually, for instance in a – Messages from the vehicle manufac- harmonic color style. turer. Messages are additionally displayed in the status field.

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 51

General settings AT A GLANCE

Retrieving messages Data protection Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "Notifications" Data transfer 2. Select the desired notification. Concept The menu in which the notification is dis- The vehicle offers various functions which played will open. require data to be transferred to MINI or a service provider. The data transfer can be Deleting messages deactivated for some functions. All messages, except Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manu- General information facturer, can be deleted from the list. With data transfer deactivated, the respec- Check Control messages or messages from tive function cannot be used. the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as Only make these settings while stationary. long as they are relevant. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Activating/deactivating 1. "Notifications" Follow the instructions on the Control Dis- play. 2. Select the desired message. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 3. Press the button. 1. "My MINI" 4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all 2. "System settings" notifications" 3. "Data privacy" Settings 4. Select the desired setting. The following settings can be adjusted: – Select the applications, from which mes- Deleting personal data in the sages will be permitted. vehicle – Sort the messages according to date or priority. Concept Via the Central Information Display (CID): Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores personal data, such as stored radio stations. 1. "My MINI" This personal data can be permanently de- 2. "System settings" leted via the Central Information Display (CID). 3. "Notifications" 4. Select the desired setting. General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data is deleted: – Driver profile settings. – Stored radio stations. – Stored programmable memory buttons.

51 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 52

AT A GLANCE General settings

– Travel and trip computer information. connection type to select depends on the – Music collection. mobile device and the desired function. – Navigation, for instance stored destinations. General information – Phone book. The following overview shows possible functions and the suitable connection types – Office data, for instance voice memos. for them. The scope of functions depends on – Login accounts. the mobile device. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take Function Connec- up to 15 minutes. tion type Functional requirement Making calls via the hands- Bluetooth. free system. Data can only be deleted while stationary. Using phone functions via Deleting data the Central Information Dis- play (CID). Note and follow the instructions on the Con- trol Display. Using the smartphone Of- fice functions. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Playing music from the Bluetooth 1. "My MINI" smartphone or the audio or USB. 2. "System settings" player. 3. "Data privacy" Using compatible apps via Bluetooth 4. "Delete personal data" the Central Information Dis- or USB. play (CID). 5. "Delete personal data" USB storage device: USB. 6. "OK" Exporting and importing 7. Exit and lock the vehicle. driver profiles. The deletion process takes 15 minutes to Update the software. complete. Playing music. If not all data was deleted, repeat the deletion. Playing videos from the USB. smartphone or the USB de- Canceling deletion vice. Start the engine to cancel deletion of the Using Apple CarPlay apps Bluetooth data. via the Central Information and Display (CID) and voice op- WLAN. eration. Connections The following connection types require one- Concept time pairing with the vehicle: Various connection types are available for – Bluetooth. using mobile devices in the vehicle. The – Apple CarPlay.

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 53

General settings AT A GLANCE

Paired devices are automatically recognized Bluetooth connection later on and connected to the vehicle. Functional requirements Safety information – Compatible device, refer to page 53, with Bluetooth interface. Warning – The vehicle key is in the vehicle. Operating the integrated information sys- – The device is ready for operation. tems and communication devices while – Bluetooth is activated on the device and driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- in the vehicle, refer to page 53. sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or – Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, devices when the traffic situation allows. may be required on the device; refer to As warranted, stop and use the systems the owner's manual of the device. and devices while the vehicle is stationary. Switching on Bluetooth Via the Central Information Display (CID): Compatible devices 1. "My MINI" General information 2. "System settings" Malfunctions may occur with devices not 3. "Mobile devices" listed or deviating software versions. 4. "Settings" Displaying the vehicle identification 5. "Bluetooth®" number and software part number Activating/deactivating telephone When looking for compatible devices, you functions may have to state the vehicle identification number and the software part number. To use all supported functions of a mobile These numbers can be displayed in the ve- phone, the following functions must be acti- hicle. vated prior to pairing. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 4. "Settings" 5. "Bluetooth® info" 5. Select the desired setting: 6. "System information" – "Office" A software update, refer to page 58, can Activate function to transmit short be performed. messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, memos, and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can be incurred by transmitting all data to the vehicle. – "Contact images"

53 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 54

AT A GLANCE General settings

Activate function to show the con- Frequently Asked Questions tact pictures. All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Pairing the mobile device with the Despite that, the mobile device does not vehicle function as expected. Via the Central Information Display (CID): In this case, the following explanations can 1. "My MINI" help: Why could the mobile phone not be paired 2. "System settings" or connected? 3. "Mobile devices" – There are too many Bluetooth devices 4. "Connect new device" connected to the mobile phone or vehi- 5. Select the functions for which the de- cle. vice will be used: Delete Bluetooth connections with other – "Telephone" devices. – "Bluetooth® audio" Delete all known Bluetooth connections from the device list on the mobile phone – "Apps" and start a new device search. – "Apple CarPlay" – The mobile phone is in power-save mode The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- or has only a limited remaining battery played on the Control Display. life. 6. On the mobile device, search for Blue- Charge the mobile phone. tooth devices in the vicinity. Why does the mobile phone no longer re- The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- act? pears on the mobile device display. – The applications on the mobile phone do Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi- not function anymore. cle. Switch the mobile phone off and on 7. Depending on the mobile device, a con- again. trol number is displayed or the control – Possibly too high or too low ambient number must be entered. temperatures for mobile phone opera- – Compare the control number dis- tion. played on the Control Display with Do not subject the mobile phone to ex- the control number on the display of treme ambient temperatures. the device. Why can phone functions not be used via Confirm the control number on the the Central Information Display (CID)? device and on the Control Display. – The mobile phone may not be properly – Enter and confirm the same control configured, for instance as Bluetooth au- number on the device and via the dio device. Central Information Display (CID). Connect the mobile phone with the tele- The device is connected and displayed phone or additional phone function. in the device list. Why are no or not all telephone book en- If connection was not successful: Fre- tries displayed or why are they incomplete? quently Asked Questions, refer to page 54.

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 55

General settings AT A GLANCE

– Transmission of the telephone book en- – Audio devices with USB port, for in- tries is not yet complete. stance MP3 players. – It is possible that only the telephone – USB storage devices. book entries of the mobile phone or the Common file systems are supported. SIM card are transmitted. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended – It may not be possible to display tele- formats. phone book entries with special charac- A connected USB device will be supplied ters. with charge current via the USB port if the – It may not be possible to transmit con- device supports this. Follow the maximum tacts from social networks. charge current of the USB port. – The number of phone book entries to be The following uses are possible on USB stored is too high. ports with data transfer: – Data volume of the contact too large, for – Exporting and importing driver profiles, instance due to stored information such refer to page 73. as memos. – Playing music files via USB audio. Reduce the data volume of the contact. – Playing videos via USB video. – A mobile phone is only connected as an – Loading of software updates, refer to audio source. page 58. Reconfigure the mobile phone and con- Follow the following when connecting: nect it with the telephone or additional phone function. – Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB port. How can the telephone connection quality be improved? – Use a flexible adapter cable. – The strength of the Bluetooth signal on – Protect the USB device against mechani- the mobile phone can be adjusted, de- cal damage. pending on the mobile phone. – Due to the large number of USB devices – Insert the mobile phone into the wire- available on the market, it cannot be less charging tray. guaranteed that every device is operable on the vehicle. – Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately. – Do not expose USB devices to extreme environmental conditions, such as very If all points in this list have been checked high temperatures; refer to the owner's and the required function is still not availa- manual of the device. ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or – Due to the many different compression repair shop. techniques, proper playback of the media stored on the USB device cannot be USB connection guaranteed in all cases. – To ensure proper transmission of the General information stored data, do not charge a USB device via the onboard socket, when it is con- The following mobile devices can be connected to the USB port. nected to the USB port: – Depending on how the USB device is be- – Mobile phones. ing used, settings may be required on

55 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 56

AT A GLANCE General settings

the USB storage device, refer to the Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay owner's manual of the device. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Not compatible USB devices: 1. "My MINI" – USB hard drives. 2. "System settings" – USB hubs. – USB memory card readers with multiple 3. "Mobile devices" slots. 4. "Settings" – HFS-formatted USB devices. 5. Select the following settings: – Devices such as fans or lamps. – "Bluetooth®" – "Apple CarPlay" Functional requirement Compatible device, refer to page 53, with Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay USB port. Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to page 54, via Bluetooth Connecting the device Select CarPlay as the function: Connect the USB device using a suitable "Apple CarPlay" adapter cable to a USB port, refer to page 219. The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list, refer to The USB device is connected to the vehicle page 57. and displayed in the device list. Apple CarPlay preparation Operation For more information, refer to the Concept Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- CarPlay allows certain functions of a communication. patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information Frequently Asked Questions Display (CID). All requirements are met and all required Functional requirements steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not – Compatible iPhone, refer to page 53. function as expected. iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. In this case, the following explanations can – Corresponding mobile contract. help: – Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera- The iPhone has already been paired with tion are activated on the iPhone. Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is – Booking the MINI Connected service: established, CarPlay can no longer be se- Apple CarPlay preparation. lected. – If necessary, the setting for mobile data – Delete the iPhone concerned from the must be activated on the iPhone. device list.

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 57

General settings AT A GLANCE

– On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con- Configuring the device cerned from the list of stored vehicles Functions can be activated or deactivated under Bluetooth and under WLAN. for paired and connected devices. – Pair the iPhone as a new device. Via the Central Information Display (CID): If the steps listed have been carried out and the required function is still not available: 1. "My MINI" contact the hotline, a dealer's service center 2. "System settings" or another qualified service center or repair 3. "Mobile devices" shop. 4. Select the desired device. Managing mobile devices 5. Select the desired setting. If a function is assigned to a device, the General information function will be deactivated where appro- – After one-time pairing, the devices are priate for a device that is already connected automatically recognized and recon- and the device will be disconnected. nected when the ignition is switched on. – The data stored on the SIM card or in Disconnecting the device the mobile phone is transferred to the The device's connection to the vehicle is vehicle after recognition. disconnected. – For some devices, certain settings may The device remains paired and can be con- be necessary, for instance authorization, nected again, refer to page 57. see owner's manual of the device. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Displaying the device list 1. "My MINI" All devices paired and/or connected with 2. "System settings" the vehicle are displayed in the device list. 3. "Mobile devices" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 4. Select device. 1. "My MINI" 5. "Disconnect device" 2. "System settings" Connecting the device 3. "Mobile devices" A disconnected device can be reconnected. A icon indicates, for which function a device is used. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Icon Function 1. "My MINI" "Telephone" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" "Additional telephone" 4. Select device. "Bluetooth® audio" 5. "Connect device" "Apps" The functions that were assigned to the de- "Apple CarPlay" vice before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. The func-

57 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 58

AT A GLANCE General settings

tions may be deactivated on a device al- Displaying the version of the installed ready connected. software The software version installed in the vehicle Deleting the device is displayed. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 3. "Software update" 4. Select device. 4. "Show current version" 5. "Delete device" If an update has been carried out before, se- The device is disconnected and removed lect the desired version to display additional from the device list. information.

Swapping the telephone and additional Updating software via USB telephone The software may only be updated when the If two mobile phones are connected to the vehicle is stationary. vehicle, the functions of the telephone and Via the Central Information Display (CID): additional telephone can be switched. 1. Store the file for the software update in Via the Central Information Display (CID): the main folder of a USB device. 1. "My MINI" 2. Connecting USB device to the USB port. 2. "System settings" 3. "My MINI" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "System settings" 4. "Settings" 5. "Software update" 5. "Swap telephone/additional tel." 6. "Update software" Software update 7. "USB" 8. "Install software" General information 9. "OK" The vehicle supports a large number of mo- 10. Wait for the update to complete. bile devices, for example mobile phones and 11. Confirm system restart. MP3 players. Software updates are available for many of the supported devices. The vehicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle Restoring the software version software updates. You can restore the software to the version Contact a dealer's service center or another prior to the last update or to its factory set- qualified service center or repair shop for tings. information on available software updates. The software may only be restored when the vehicle is stationary. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 59

General settings AT A GLANCE

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Software update" 4. "Restore software" 5. – "Previous version" The previous software version is restored. – "Default software settings" The first software version is restored. 6. "Remove software" 7. "OK" 8. Wait for restore. 9. Confirm system restart.

59 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 60

AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media

Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options Supplementary Owner's Manuals Also follow the Supplementary Owner's This chapter describes all standard, country- Manuals, which are included in addition to specific and optional features offered with the onboard literature. the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Integrated Owner's Manual in tions or country versions. This also applies the vehicle to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be Concept observed. The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual General information can be displayed on the Control Display.

You can use the following media formats to Selecting the Owner's Manual call up the content in the Owner's Manual: 1. Press the button. – Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 60. 2. "My MINI" – Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi- 3. "Owner's Manual" cle, refer to page 60. 4. Select the desired method of accessing the contents. Printed Owner's Manual Scrolling through the Owner's Manual Concept Turn the Controller, until the next or previ- The printed Owner's Manual describes all ous contents are displayed. standard, country-specific, and optional features offered with the series. Context help

General information General information The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- The section of the Owner's Manual relating tainment, and Communication can be ob- to the function that is currently selected tained as a printed book from the service can be displayed directly. center.

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 61

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE

Opening via Central Information Display (CID) Change directly to the Options menu from the function on the Control Display:

1. Press the button. 2. "Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: "Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To switch from a function, for instance radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays:

1. Press the button. 2. "Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.

4. Press the button again to return to the last displayed function.

5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. To alternate continuously between the last displayed function and the last displayed page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.

61 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 62

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options Safety Instructions

This chapter describes all standard, country- Warning specific and optional features offered with The vehicle key has a button cell battery. the series. It also describes features and Batteries or button cells can be swallowed functions that are not necessarily available and lead to serious or fatal injuries within in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- two hours, for example, due to internal tions or country versions. This also applies burns or chemical burns. There is an in- to safety-related functions and systems. jury hazard or danger to life. Keep the ve- When using these functions and systems, hicle key and batteries out of reach for the applicable laws and regulations must be children. Immediately seek medical help if observed. there is any suspicion that a battery or button cell has been swallowed or is located in any part of the body. Vehicle key

General information Warning The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle People or animals in the vehicle can lock keys with integrated key. the doors from the inside and lock them- Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat- selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot tery, refer to page 65. be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so Depending on the equipment and country that the vehicle can be opened from the version, various settings, refer to page 75, outside. can be configured for the button functions. A personal driver profile, refer to page 73, for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle. Warning To provide information on maintenance rec- Unattended children or animals in the ve- ommendations, the service data is stored in hicle can cause the vehicle to move and the vehicle key, refer to page 279. endanger themselves and traffic, for in- To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle stance due to the following actions: key, take the vehicle key with you when ex- – Pressing the Start/Stop button. iting the vehicle. – Releasing the parking brake. – Opening and closing the doors or windows. – Engaging selector lever position N. – Using vehicle equipment.

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 63

Opening and closing CONTROLS

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do – The driver's seat is set to the last posi- not leave children or animals unattended tion saved in the driver's profile. This in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with function must be activated in the set- you when exiting and lock the vehicle. tings, refer to page 75. – The interior lights, refer to page 152, and the MINI logo projection are Overview switched on, provided that the interior lights were not switched off manually. – Depending on the settings, the welcome light and pathway lighting, refer to page 149, are switched on. – The alarm system, refer to page 77, is switched off. The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness. 1 Unlocking Convenient opening 2 Locking Press and hold the button on the ve- 3 Open split doors hicle key after unlocking. 4 Panic mode The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle Unlocking key is pressed. Press the button on the vehicle key. Locking 1. Close the driver's door. Depending on the settings, refer to page 75, the following access points are 2. Press the button on the vehicle unlocked. key. – Driver's door and fuel filler flap. The following functions are executed: Press the button on the vehicle key – All doors, the split doors, and the fuel again to unlock the other vehicle access filler flap are locked. points. – Locking is confirmed by the turn signals – All doors, the split doors, and fuel filler and the horn. This function must be ac- flap. tivated in the settings, refer to In addition, the following functions are exe- page 75. cuted: – The alarm system, refer to page 77, is – Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig- switched on. nals and the horn. This function must be If the engine or ignition is still switched on activated in the settings, refer to when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn page 75. honks twice. In this case, the engine or ig- – The settings stored in the driver profile, nition must be switched off by means of the refer to page 73, are applied. Start/Stop button.

63 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 64

CONTROLS Opening and closing

With Comfort Access: convenient whether the split doors can be opened with closing the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, re- Safety information fer to page 75. When the trailer socket occupied, the split doors cannot be opened with the vehicle Warning key or with the button in the car's interior. With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make Safety information sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing. Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating Closing the split doors. There is a risk of injury. Press and hold the button on the ve- Make sure that the area of movement of hicle key in the area close to the ve- the split doors is clear during opening and hicle. closing. The windows and the glass sunroof are closed, as long as the button on the vehicle NOTICE key is pressed. The split doors swivel back and to the side when they open. There is a risk of damage Switch on interior lights and to property, among other potential dam- courtesy light age. Make sure that the area of movement Press the button on the vehicle key of the split doors is clear during opening with the vehicle locked. and closing. The MINI logo projection is also switched on. NOTICE These functions are not available if the inte- Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the rior lights were switched off manually. windows and heat conductors while driv- The light functions may depend on the am- ing. There is a risk of damage to property, bient brightness. among other potential damage. Cover the After locking, wait 10 seconds before press- edges and ensure that pointed objects do ing the button again. not hit the windows.

Split Doors Opening

General information 1. Press the button on the vehicle To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- key for approx. 1 second. cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo The right side of the split doors opens. area. Depending on the vehicle equipment and 2. Press the button on the vehicle country version, it is possible to specify key again for approx. 1 second.

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 65

Opening and closing CONTROLS

The left side of the split doors opens. 3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the Panic mode cover. You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. – Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds. – Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession. To switch off the alarm: press any button. 4. Push battery in arrow direction using a Replacing the battery pointed object and lift it out.

NOTE Improper batteries in the vehicle key can damage the vehicle key. There is a danger of damage to property. Always replace the discharged battery with a battery with the same voltage, the same size and the same specification.

1. Remove the integrated key from the ve- 5. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with hicle key, refer to page 67. the positive side facing up. 2. Slide the integrated key into the open- 6. Insert lid and cover. ing and raise the cover. 7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle The battery compartment is accessible. key until it engages. Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or specialist workshop or take them to a collection point.

Additional vehicle keys Additional vehicle keys are available from a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Loss of vehicle keys A lost vehicle key can be blocked and replaced by a dealer’s service center or an-

65 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 66

CONTROLS Opening and closing

other qualified service center or repair Starting the engine via emergency shop. detection of the Vehicle key Malfunction

General information A Check Control message is displayed. Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances: – The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. For replacing the battery, refer It is not possible to start the engine if the to page 65. vehicle key has not been detected. – Interference of the radio connection Proceed as follows in this case: from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting 1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark power. on the steering column as shown. Pay attention to the display in the instru- – Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ment cluster. objects. 2. If the vehicle key is detected: Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects. Start the engine within 10 seconds. – Interference of the radio connection If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly from mobile phones or other electronic change the position of the vehicle key and devices in direct proximity to the vehi- repeat the procedure. cle key. Do not carry the vehicle key in close Frequently Asked Questions proximity to other electronic devices. What precautions can be taken to be able to – Interference of radio transmission by a open a vehicle with an accidentally locked charging process of mobile devices, for in vehicle key? instance charging of a mobile phone. – The options provided by the Remote – The vehicle key is in direct proximity of Services of the MINI Connected app in- the wireless charging tray. clude the ability to lock and unlock a vehicle. Place the vehicle key in a different location. This requires an active MINI Connected contract and the MINI Connected app In the case of interference, the vehicle can must be installed on a smartphone. be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key, refer to page 67. – Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the MINI Connected Call Center. An active MINI Connected contract is required.

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 67

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Integrated key Removing

General information The driver's door can be locked and unlocked without the vehicle key using the integrated key. Safety information

Warning Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the Unlocking from the inside is only possible integrated key, arrow 2. with special knowledge. Persons who spend a lengthy time in the Locking/unlocking via the door vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. lock Do not lock the vehicle from the outside 1. Remove lid on the door lock. when there are people in it. To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening from below and remove the lid. NOTICE The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Remove the integrated key before pulling the external door handle. 2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key. The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside. Alarm system The alarm system is not switched on if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key. The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the door lock.

67 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 68

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Buttons for the central locking – Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on the door to be opened; the first system time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked. General information In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard Comfort Access warning system and interior lights come on. Concept Overview The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key. Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient. The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior. General information Comfort Access supports the following Buttons for the central locking system. functions: – Unlocking and locking the vehicle. Locking – Convenient closing. Press the button with the front – Opening split doors. doors closed. – Open split doors with no-touch activa- – The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. tion. – The vehicle is not secured against theft This function is not available in vehicles when locking. with a trailer hitch. Unlocking Functional requirements – To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must Press the button. be outside of the vehicle near the doors. – The next unlocking and locking cycle is Opening not possible until after approx. 2 seconds. – Press button to unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle above the armrest. – Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked.

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 69

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Unlocking Convenient closing

Safety information

Warning With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button. Closing Depending on the settings, refer to page 75, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlike when unlocking using the vehicle key, pressing the button on the outer door handle again does not unlock the other vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked again. If the vehicle was locked automatically after driving off or with the button of the central Press and hold down the button on the driv- locking system from the inside, note the fol- er's or front passenger's outer door handle. lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle is In addition to locking, the windows and opened from the inside with the door glass sunroof will be closed. opener, pressing the button on the outer door handle will first lock the vehicle again. To unlock, the button on the outer door han- Open split doors dle must be pressed again. General information Locking If the split doors are opened via Comfort Ac- cess, locked doors are not unlocked. To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

69 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 70

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Safety information Touchless opening of split doors

Warning Concept Body parts can be jammed when operating The split doors can be opened with no-touch the split doors. There is a risk of injury. activation using the vehicle key you are car- Make sure that the area of movement of rying. Two sensors detect a forward-di- the split doors is clear during opening and rected foot motion in the center of the area closing. at the rear of the vehicle and the split doors open.

General information NOTICE To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- The split doors swivel back and to the side cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo when they open. There is a risk of damage area. to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the area of movement This function is not available in vehicles of the split doors is clear during opening with a trailer hitch or with a rear luggage and closing. rack preparation. If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the split doors may open or close inadvertently NOTICE if you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot movement is detected. Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv- The sensor has an approximate range of ing. There is a risk of damage to property, 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the among other potential damage. Cover the vehicle. edges and ensure that pointed objects do If the split doors are opened with no-touch not hit the windows. activation, locked doors are not unlocked. Contactless opening of the split doors must be activated in the settings. Opening Safety information

Warning During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas system. There is a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do not touch the vehicle. First press button in right-hand handle, arrow 1, then press button in left-hand handle, arrow 2.

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 71

Opening and closing CONTROLS

back. With this movement, the leg must Warning pass through the ranges of both sensors. Body parts can be jammed when operating the split doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the split doors is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE The split doors swivel back and to the side when they open. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential dam- Opening age. Make sure that the area of movement 1. Perform the foot movement described of the split doors is clear during opening earlier. and closing. The right side of the split doors opens. 2. After complete opening of the right side, Settings make a second foot movement in order 1. "My MINI" to open the left side of the split doors. Before the opening, the hazard warning sys- 2. "Vehicle settings" tem flashes. 3. "Doors/Key" 4. "Tailgate" System limits 5. Select the desired setting: The detection of the foot movement may be limited due to the following external condi- "Open by foot movement" tions: Contactless opening of the split doors is – Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the ve- switched on or off. hicle. Performing the foot movement – Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at approx. one arm's length away from Movement in the range of the sensors may the rear of the vehicle. cause unintended opening or closing of the cargo area, for instance due to water run- 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di- ning own when cleaning the vehicle or with rection of travel and immediately pull it heavy rainfall. To prevent such unintended opening or closing of the cargo area in such cases, keep the vehicle key at a sufficient distance from the rear of the vehicle. Malfunction Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances:

71 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 72

CONTROLS Opening and closing

– The battery of the vehicle key is dis- Safety information charged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 65. Warning – Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other Body parts can be jammed when operating equipment with high transmitting the split doors. There is a risk of injury. power. Make sure that the area of movement of the split doors is clear during opening and – Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal closing. objects. Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects. NOTICE – Interference of the radio connection The split doors swivel back and to the side from mobile phones or other electronic when they open. There is a risk of damage devices in direct proximity to the vehi- to property, among other potential dam- cle key. age. Make sure that the area of movement Do not carry the vehicle key in close of the split doors is clear during opening proximity to other electronic devices. and closing. Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking request recognition function on the door handles. NOTICE In the case of a malfunction, unlock and Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the lock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve- windows and heat conductors while driv- hicle key or use the integrated key, refer to ing. There is a risk of damage to property, page 67. among other potential damage. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows. Split Doors

General information Opening from the outside To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the split doors can be opened with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 75. When the trailer socket occupied, the split – Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. doors cannot be opened with the vehicle With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi- key or with the button in the car's interior. cle or have the vehicle key with you.

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 73

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Use the button in the handle to com- General information pletely open first the right side, arrow 1, There are three driver profiles with which and then the left side of the split doors, personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev- arrow 2. ery vehicle key has been assigned one of – Press and hold the button on the these driver profiles. vehicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle Depending on the setting, the doors may key, the assigned personal driver profile will also be unlocked. Unlocking using the be activated. All settings stored in the vehicle key, refer to page 64. driver profile are automatically applied. The right side of the split doors opens. If several drivers use their own vehicle Press and hold the button on the keys, the vehicle will apply the personal set- vehicle key again for approx. tings as it is being unlocked. These settings 1 second. are also restored, if the vehicle has been The left side of the split doors opens. used in the meantime by a person with a different vehicle key. Opening from the inside Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently acti- With Steptronic transmission: vated. With the vehicle stationary, press If another driver profile is selected via the the button in the driver's floor area. Central Information Display (CID), the set- If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi- tings stored in it will be applied automati- tion P must be engaged first. cally. The new driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key that is currently in use. With manual transmission: There is an additional guest profile available With the vehicle stationary, press that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it the button in the driver's floor area twice in can be used to apply settings in the vehicle quick succession. without changing the personal driver profiles. The right split door opens. Press button again to open the left split door as well. Functional requirements Closing For the system to be able to identify the driver profile associated to a particular To close the split doors, first close the left driver, the detected vehicle key must be side, then the right side. clearly allocated to the driver. This is the case when: Driver profiles – The driver is only carrying his or her own vehicle key. Concept – The driver unlocks the vehicle. – The driver gets into the vehicle through In the driver profiles, individual settings for the driver's door. several drivers can be stored and called up again when required.

73 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 74

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Settings – All settings stored in the selected driver The settings, for instance for the following profile are automatically applied. systems and functions, are stored in the ac- – The called-up driver profile is assigned tive profile. The scope of storable settings to the vehicle key being used at the depends on country and equipment. time. – Unlocking and locking. – If the driver profile is already assigned – Lights. to a different vehicle key, this driver profile will apply to both vehicle keys. – Radio. – Instrument cluster. Using a guest profile – Programmable memory buttons. The guest profile is for individual settings – Volumes, sound. that are stored in none of the three personal – Control Display. driver profiles. – Climate control. Via the Central Information Display (CID): – Navigation. 1. "My MINI" – PDC Park Distance Control. 2. "Driver profiles" – Rearview camera. 3. "Drive off (guest)" – Head-up Display. 4. "OK" – MINI Driving Modes. The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is – Intelligent Safety. not assigned to the vehicle key currently in – Driver's seat position, exterior mirror use. position. Renaming a driver profile Both the positions saved via the seat memory and the last position set are A personal name can be assigned to the ac- saved. tive driver profile to avoid confusion between the driver profiles. Profile management Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" Selecting a driver profile 2. "Driver profiles" Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a different driver profile may be activated. This 3. Select driver profile. allows you to call up personal vehicle set- The driver profile marked with this tings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle icon can be renamed. with your own vehicle key. 4. "Change driver profile name" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 5. Enter profile name. 1. "My MINI" 6. Select the icon. 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile. Resetting a driver profile 4. "OK" The settings of the driver profile currently in use are reset to their factory settings.

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 75

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Via the Central Information Display (CID): 4. "Import driver profile (USB)" 1. "My MINI" Select USB storage device as needed. 2. "Driver profiles" 5. Select the driver profile to be imported. 3. Select driver profile. Displaying driver profiles during start The driver profile marked with this The driver profiles can be displayed at each icon can be reset. startup to select the desired profile. 4. "Reset driver profile" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 5. "OK" 1. "My MINI" Exporting driver profiles 2. "Driver profiles" Most settings of the active driver profile 3. "Show driver profiles at startup" can be exported. Exporting is helpful when storing and re- System limits trieving personal settings, for instance be- A clear assignment between the vehicle key fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop. and driver may not be possible in the fol- The stored driver profiles can be taken into lowing cases, for example. another vehicle. – The passenger unlocks the vehicle with Via the Central Information Display (CID): his or her own vehicle key, but another 1. "My MINI" person is driving. – The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com- 2. "Driver profiles" fort Access and has multiple vehicle 3. Select driver profile. keys with him or her. The driver profile marked with this – The driver changes, but the vehicle is icon can be exported. not locked and unlocked. 4. "Export driver profile (USB)" – Multiple vehicle keys are located out- Select USB storage device as needed. side of the vehicle.

Importing driver profiles Profiles stored on a USB device can be im- Settings ported via the USB port. The existing settings of the active driver General information profile are overwritten with the settings of Depending on the package and country ver- the imported driver profile. sion, various settings are available for the Via the Central Information Display (CID): vehicle key functions. 1. "My MINI" These settings are stored for the driver profile, refer to page 73, currently used. 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select the driver profile to overwrite. The driver profile marked with this icon can be overwritten.

75 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 76

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Unlocking Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, this setting may not be of- Doors fered. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Adjusting the last seat and mirror 1. "My MINI" position 2. "Vehicle settings" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 3. "Doors/Key" 1. "My MINI" 4. "Driver's door" or "All doors" 2. "Driver profiles" 5. Select the desired setting: 3. Select driver profile. – "Driver's door only" The setting can be made for the Only the driver's door and the fuel driver profile marked with this icon. filler flap are unlocked. Pressing 4. "Last seat position automatic" again unlocks the entire vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's – "All doors" seat and exterior mirrors resume their last The entire vehicle is unlocked. set positions. The most recent position is independent of Split doors the positions saved via the seat memory. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Automatic locking 1. "My MINI" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 1. "My MINI" 4. 2. "Vehicle settings" The text next to the icon indicates the 3. "Doors/Key" current setting. 4. Select the desired setting: 5. Select the desired setting: – "Lock automatically" – "Split Rear Doors" The vehicle locks automatically after Only the split doors are opened. a while if no door is opened after unlocking. – "Split Rear Doors and door(s)" – "Lock after starting to drive" The split doors are opened and the doors unlocked. The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off. – "Split doors open only when the vehicle has first been unlocked" Automatic unlocking The vehicle must be unlocked before the split doors can be used with the Via the Central Information Display (CID): vehicle key. 1. "My MINI" – "Button lock" 2. "Vehicle settings" It is not possible to use the split doors via the vehicle key.

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 77

Opening and closing CONTROLS

3. "Doors/Key" – Locking the vehicle while a device is 4. "Unlock at end of trip" connected to the socket for the OBD On- board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD After the engine is switched off by Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 280. pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is automatically un- The alarm system signals these changes vis- locked. ually and acoustically: – Acoustic alarm: Confirmation signals from the Depending on local regulations, the vehicle acoustic alarm may be suppressed. Via the Central Information Display (CID): – Visual alarm: By flashing of the hazard warning sys- 1. "My MINI" tem and headlights, where required. 2. "Vehicle settings" Do not modify the system to ensure func- 3. "Doors/Key" tion of the alarm system. 4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirmation signals. Overview – "Flash for lock/unlock" Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, locking by one. – With alarm system: "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock" Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn.

Indicator light in the roof fin. Alarm system

General information When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes: – Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or the split doors. – Movements in the vehicle interior. – Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, Indicator light on the interior mirror. during attempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the vehicle. Switching on/off – Disconnected battery voltage. The alarm system is switched on or off as – Improper use of the socket for Onboard soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehi- Diagnosis.

77 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 78

CONTROLS Opening and closing

cle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm Access. sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid are not correctly closed. Cor- Opening the doors with the alarm rectly closed access points are secured. system switched on When the still open access points are The alarm system is triggered when a door closed, the interior motion sensor and is opened if the door was unlocked using tilt alarm sensor will be switched on. the integrated key in the door lock. – The indicator light goes out after un- Switching off the alarm, refer to page 79. locking: The vehicle has not been tampered with. Opening the split doors with the – The indicator light flashes after unlock- alarm system switched on ing until the engine ignition is switched The split doors can be opened even when on, but no longer than approx. 5 mi- the alarm system is switched on. nutes: After the split doors are closed, they are An alarm has been triggered. locked and monitored again when the doors are locked. The hazard warning system Tilt alarm sensor flashes once. The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations Panic mode such as attempts to steal a wheel or when You can trigger the alarm system if you find the vehicle is towed. yourself in a dangerous situation. – Press the button on the vehicle Interior motion sensor key and hold for at least 3 sec- The windows and the glass sunroof must be onds. closed for the system to function properly. – Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession. Avoiding unintentional alarms To switch off the alarm: press any button. General information The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion Signals of the indicator lights sensor can trigger an alarm, although no un- – The indicator light flashes briefly every authorized action occurred. 2 seconds: Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: The alarm system is switched on. – In automatic car washes. – Indicator light flashes for approx. – In duplex garages. 10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every – During transport on trains carrying ve- 2 seconds: hicles, at sea or on a trailer. Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm – With animals in the vehicle. sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or split doors are not correctly closed. Cor- – When the vehicle is locked after start of rectly closed access points are secured. fueling.

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 79

Opening and closing CONTROLS

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo- the windows is clear during opening and tion sensor can be switched off in such sit- closing. uations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and Overview interior motion sensor Press the button on the vehicle key within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked. The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 seconds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again. Power windows. Switching off the alarm – Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key. Safety switch. – Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key and switch on the ignition using the emergency detection of the vehicle key, Opening refer to page 66. – Press the switch to the resistance – With Comfort Access: if you have the point. vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle The window opens while the switch is using the button on the driver's side or being held. passenger side door. – Press the switch beyond the resistance point. Power windows The window opens automatically. Press- ing the switch again stops the motion. General information Convenient opening with the vehicle key, If an accident of a certain severity occurs, refer to page 63. the windows are automatically closed except a gap. Closing

Safety information – Pull the switch to the resistance point. Warning The window closes while the switch is being held. When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk – Pull the switch beyond the resist- of injury or risk of damage to property. ance point. Make sure that the area of movement of

79 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 80

CONTROLS Opening and closing

The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again 2. Pull the switch past the resistance stops the motion. point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. Convenient closing with the vehicle key, refer to page 64. The window closes without jam protection. Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 69. Safety switch

Jam protection system General information Concept The safety switch can be used to prevent children, for instance from opening and The jam protection prevents objects or body closing the rear windows using the parts becoming jammed between the door switches in the rear. frame and window while a window is being closed. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the safety function is switched off automati- General information cally. If resistance or a blockage is detected while Switching on/off a window is being closed, the closing action is interrupted. Press the button. The LED lights up if the safety func- Safety information tion is switched on.

Warning Malfunction Accessories on the windows such as antennas can impact jam protection. There is General information a risk of injury. Do not install accessories In certain situations a window can only be in the area of movement of the windows. operated to a limited extent. – After a power failure during the opening Closing without the jam protection or closing process, the a window can system only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case. In case of danger from the outside or if ice – The power window motors are equipped might prevent normal closing, proceed as with overheating protection. If a win- follows: dow is opened and closed several times within a short period of time, the over- 1. Pull the switch past the resistance heating protection switches the motor point and hold it there. off temporarily. Depending on the de- The window closes with limited jam pro- gree of overheating, it may only be pos- tection. If the closing force exceeds a sible to close the window or it may not specific threshold, closing is inter- be possible to operate it at all. rupted. In this case: allow the power window motor to cool down.

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 81

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Initializing the system Safety information The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is run- Warning ning. Body parts can be jammed when operating During initialization, the affected window the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. closes without jam protection. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening Warning and closing. When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk Overview of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. Pull the switch to the resistance point and hold. The window closes. 3. Continue holding the switch pulled Tilting the glass sunroof to the resistance point. Press back the switch up to or The window opens and closes once or beyond the resistance point twice after approx. 15 seconds, depend- and release it. ing on the vehicle's equipment. The glass sunroof is raised. 4. Release switch.

Opening glass sunroof Panoramic glass sunroof When the glass sunroof is closed General information Press the switch back beyond In the event of a severe accident, the glass the resistance point and re- sunroof is automatically closed. lease it twice. The glass sunroof is opened. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

81 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 82

CONTROLS Opening and closing

With the glass sunroof completely Pressing the switch again stops the mo- raised tion. – Slide switch back to the resistance point and hold. With the glass sunroof completely raised The glass sunroof is opened as long as the Press the switch forward be- switch is pressed. yond the resistance point and – Press the switch back beyond the resist- release it. ance point and release it. The glass sunroof is closed. The glass sunroof is opened. Pressing the switch again stops the mo- Opening/closing the sun protection tion. Comfort position In some models, the wind noises in the car's interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the automatic function initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position. Pressing the switch again opens the glass sunroof fully. Use the handle to slide the sun protection Closing glass sunroof into the desired position.

With the glass sunroof open Jam protection system – Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold. Concept The glass sunroof is closed The jam protection prevents objects or body as long as the switch is parts from becoming jammed between the pressed and stops in the roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun- raised position. roof is closing. – Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it. General information The glass sunroof is closed and stops in If resistance or a blockage is detected while the raised position. the glass sunroof is being closed, the closing action is interrupted. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. The glass sunroof opens slightly. – Press the switch forward beyond the re- Closing without the jam protection sistance point and release it twice. system The glass sunroof is closed. If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 83

Opening and closing CONTROLS

1. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it. The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted. 2. Push the switch forward again past the resistance point and hold until the glass sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear. Initializing after a power interruption After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case. MINI recommends having this work performed only by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

83 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 84

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options Warning This chapter describes all standard, country- With a backrest inclined too far to the specific and optional features offered with rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no the series. It also describes features and longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid- functions that are not necessarily available ing under the safety belt in an accident. in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. tions or country versions. This also applies Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. to safety-related functions and systems. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the When using these functions and systems, most upright position as possible and do the applicable laws and regulations must be not adjust again while driving. observed.

Warning Sitting safely There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk An ideal seat position that meets the needs of damage to property. Make sure that the of the occupants can make a vital contribu- area of movement of the seat is clear prior tion to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. to any adjustment. In the event of an accident, the correct seat position plays an important role. Follow the Manually adjustable seats information in the following chapters: – Seats, refer to page 84. Overview – Safety belts, refer to page 87. – Head restraints, refer to page 89. – Airbags, refer to page 154.

Front seats

Safety information 1 Forward/backward Warning 2 Thigh support Seat setting while driving can lead to un- 3 Height expected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of ac- 4 Backrest tilt cident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 85

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS

Forward/backward Backrest tilt

Warning Unexpected movements of the seat while driving may occur if the seat is unlocked. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. After adjusting, move the seat forward or back slightly, making sure the seat engages properly.

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture. Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction.

Height

Turn the wheel in order to increase or de- crease the curvature.

Electrically adjustable seats

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as General information needed to reach the desired height. The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the profile currently used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the vehicle key, the position is automatically retrieved if the function, refer to page 76, is activated for this purpose. The current seat position can be stored using the memory function, refer to page 91.

85 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 86

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Overview Seat tilt

1 Memory function Tilt switch up or down. 2 Lumbar support 3 Backrest tilt Backrest tilt 4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Forward/backward

Tilt switch forward or backward.

Lumbar support Press switch forward or backward. Concept The curvature of the seat backrest can be Height adjusted in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Adjusting – Press the front/rear section of the button: The curvature is increased/decreased. – Press the upper/lower sec- Press switch up or down. tion of the button: The curvature is shifted up/down.

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 87

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS

Thigh support Switching off Press and hold the button until the LEDs go out.

Safety belts

General information The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad- ensure occupant safety. However, they can just the thigh support. only unfold their protective effect when adjusted correctly. Front seat heating Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off. Although airbags enhance safety by provid- Overview ing added protection, they do not replace safety belts. All belt fastening points are designed to achieve the best possible protective effect of the safety belts with proper use of the safety belts and correct seat setting. Follow notes on sitting safely, refer to page 84. The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear seat are intended for the persons sitting on the left and right. Seat heating The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is intended for the person sitting in the middle. Switching on Safety information Press the button once for each temperature level. The maximum temperature is reached when Warning three LEDs are lit. Use of a safety belt to buckle more than If the trip is continued within approx. one person will potentially defeat the abil- 15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is ity of the safety belt to serve its protective switched on automatically with the temper- function. There is a risk of injuries or dan- ature selected last. ger to life. Do not allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Infants When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to and children are not allowed on an occu- page 240, the heating output is reduced. pant's lap, but must be transported and se-

87 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 88

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

cured in designated child restraint sys- Correct use of safety belts tems. – Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to your body over your lap and should- ers. Warning – Wear the safety belt deep on your hips The efficacy of safety gear, including over your lap. The safety belt may not safety belts, can be limited or lost when press on your stomach. safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An – Do not rub the safety belt against sharp incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause edges, or guide it or jam it in across additional injuries, for instance in the hard or fragile objects. event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or – Avoid thick clothing. danger to life. Make sure that all occu- – Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up- pants are wearing safety belts correctly. ward around your upper body. Buckling the safety belt Warning 1. Guide the safety belt slowly over With a rear backrest that is not locked, the shoulder and hip to put it on. protective function of the middle safety 2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must injuries or danger to life. If you are using engage audibly. the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.

Warning The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations: – The safety belts or safety belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way. Unbuckling the safety belt – Belt tensioners or belt retractors 1. Hold the safety belt firmly. were modified. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll- of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify up mechanism. safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 89

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS

Safety belt reminder for driver's – Before driving, install the removed seat and front passenger seat head restraints on the occupied seats. – Adjust the head restraint so its center Display in the instrument cluster supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible. The indicator light lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the – Adjust the distance so that the head safety belts are positioned correctly. restraint is as close as possible to the The safety belt reminder can also be acti- back of the head. Adjust the distance vated if objects are placed on the front pas- via the backrest tilt as needed. senger seat. Warning Safety belt reminder for rear seats Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. General information Make sure that the area of movement is The safety belt reminder is automatically clear when moving the head restraint. activated each time the engine starts. The safety belt reminder is also activated when a passenger unbuckles a rear seat Warning safety belt during the trip. Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck Display in the instrument cluster area. There is a risk of injury. The indicator light in the instrument cluster – Do not use seat or head restraint cov- illuminates after the engine is started. ers. Icon Description – Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head Green: the safety belt is buckled restraint. on the corresponding rear seat. – Only use accessories that have been Red: the safety belt is not buckled determined to be safe for attachment on the corresponding rear seat. to a head restraint. – Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving. Front head restraints Adjusting the height: John Cooper Works sport seat Safety information The height of the head restraints cannot be set. Warning Removal or incorrect adjustment of head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

89 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 90

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Adjusting the height Rear head restraints

Safety information

Warning Removal or incorrect adjustment of head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. – Before driving, install the removed – To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and head restraints on the occupied seats. push the head restraint down. – Adjust the head restraint so its center – To raise: push the head restraint up. supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible. After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly. – Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance Removing: John Cooper Works via the backrest tilt as needed. sport seat The head restraints cannot be removed. Warning Removing Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Only remove the head restraint if no one Make sure that the area of movement is will be sitting in the seat in question. clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. – Do not use seat or head restraint covers. 1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest – Do not hang objects, for instance forward. clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint. 2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible. – Only use accessories that have been 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the determined to be safe for attachment head restraint out completely. to a head restraint. – Do not use any accessories, for in- Installing stance pillows, while driving. Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 91

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS

Adjusting the height

1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to page 231, in question. – To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down. 2. Pull head restraint up against the resistance. – To raise: push the head restraint up. 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint out completely. head restraint engages correctly. Installing Fold down Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Memory function

Concept The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory function: – To fold down: press the button, arrow 1, – Seat position. and press down the head restraint, arrow 2. – Exterior mirror position. – Forward: fold the head restraint toward – Height of the Head-up Display. the front as far as it will go. Make sure that the head restraint engages cor- General information rectly. Different settings can be assigned to two memory locations. Removing The setting of the lumbar support is not Only remove the head restraint if no one stored. will be sitting in the seat in question.

91 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 92

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Safety information Press the desired button 1 or 2. The procedure stops when a seat setting Warning switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed. There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk Once underway, adjustment of the seat po- of damage to property. Make sure that the sition on the driver's side is disabled after a area of movement of the seat is clear prior short while. to any adjustment. Call up deactivated After a brief period, calling up stored seat Warning positions is deactivated to save battery power. Using the memory function while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the To reactivate calling up of a seat position: seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is – Open or close the door or split doors. a risk of accident. Only retrieve the mem- – Press a button on the vehicle key. ory function when the vehicle is station- – Press the Start/Stop button. ary.

Overview Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General information The mirror on the front passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror. The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the vehicle key, the position is automatically retrieved if the function, refer Storing to page 76, is activated for this purpose. 1. Switch on the ignition. The current exterior mirror position can be 2. Set the desired position. stored using the memory function, refer to page 91. 3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up. Safety information 4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit. The LED goes out. Warning Objects reflected in the mirror are closer Calling up settings than they appear. The distance to the traf- The stored position is called up automati- fic behind could be incorrectly estimated, cally. for instance while changing lanes. There is a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 93

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS

the traffic behind by looking over your car's interior mirror, refer to page 94, are shoulder. used to control this. Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior Overview mirror

Concept If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.

Activating 1 Adjusting 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon- 1. slide the switch to the driver's itor side mirror position. 3 Folding in and out 2. Engage selector lever position R. Deactivating Selecting a mirror Slide the switch to the passenger's side mir- To change over to the other mirror: ror position. Slide the switch. Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Adjusting electrically Flip lever Press the button. The mirror movement follows the button movement.

Malfunction In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.

Automatic heating To reduce the blinding effect of the interior Both exterior mirrors are automatically mirror, flip the lever forward. heated as needed and when the ignition is switched on.

Automatic dimming feature The exterior mirror on the driver's side is automatically dimmed. Photocells in the

93 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 94

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Turn button Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the vehicle is sta- Turn the button to reduce the blinding ef- tionary only. fect by the interior mirror.

Interior mirror, automatic dimming Adjusting feature

Overview

1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer- red height and angle to suit your seat Photocells are used for control: position. – In the mirror glass. 3. Fold the lever back up. – On the back of the mirror. Heated steering wheel Functional requirements Overview – Keep the photocells clean. – Do not cover the area between the interior mirror and the windshield.

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 95

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS

Heated steering wheel

Switching on/off Press the button.

– On: the LED lights up. – Off: the LED goes out. If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes after an intermediate stop, the heated steering wheel switches on automatically if the function was switched on at the end of the last trip.

95 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 96

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options Warning This chapter describes all standard, country- A heated vehicle may result in death to specific and optional features offered with persons, especially children, or animals. the series. It also describes features and There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. functions that are not necessarily available Do not leave persons, especially children, in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- or animals unattended in the vehicle. tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, Warning the applicable laws and regulations must be Exposure to intense sunlight can cause observed. child restraint systems and their components to become very hot. Persons may sustain burn injuries when touching the The right place for children hot components. There is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child restraint system to Safety information direct sunlight or cover where necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do Warning not leave children unattended in the vehi- Unattended children or animals in the ve- cle. hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: Transport children in the rear seat – Pressing the Start/Stop button. General information – Releasing the parking brake. Accident research shows that the safest – Opening and closing the doors or place for children is in the rear seat. windows. Children younger than 13 years of age or – Engaging selector lever position N. shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be trans- – Using vehicle equipment. ported in the rear seat in suitable child re- There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do straint systems designed for the age, weight not leave children or animals unattended and size of the child. Children 13 years of in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with age or older must wear a safety belt as soon you when exiting and lock the vehicle. as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, or size.

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 97

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

Safety information Warning Warning The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect The safety belt cannot be fastened cor- seat setting or improper installation of the rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, child seat. There is a risk of injuries or 150 cm without suitable additional child danger to life. Make sure that the child re- restraint systems. The efficacy of safety straint system fits securely against the gear, including safety belts, can be limited backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest or lost when safety belts are fastened in- tilt for all affected backrests and correctly correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and belt can cause additional injuries, for in- backrests are securely engaged or locked. stance in the event of an accident, braking If possible, adjust the height of the head or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in- restraints or remove them. juries or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems. Installing child restraint sys- Children on the front passenger tems seat General information General information Pay attention to the specifications of the Before using a child restraint system on the child restraint system manufacturer when front passenger seat, ensure that the front, selecting, installing, and using child re- knee, and side airbags on the front passen- straint systems. ger side are deactivated. For automatic deactivation of front-seat passenger airbags, Safety information refer to page 156.

Safety information Warning The protective effect of child restraint systems and their fastening systems which Warning have been damaged or exposed to an acci- Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot jure a child in a child restraint system be properly restrained in the event of an when the airbags are activated. There is a accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. risk of injury. Make sure that the front- There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. seat passenger airbags are deactivated and Do not use child restraint systems which that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- have been damaged or exposed to an acci- tor light lights up. dent. If a child restraint system and its fastening system has been damaged or exposed to an accident, have these systems checked and replaced by the dealer's serv-

97 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 98

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

ice center or another qualified service cen- and to offer optimal protection in the event ter or repair shop. of an accident. If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child Warning seat, move the front passenger seat care- The stability of the child restraint system fully forward until the best possible belt is limited or compromised with incorrect guide position is reached. seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or Child seat security danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

On the front passenger seat The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to Deactivating airbags fasten child restraint systems.

Warning Locking the safety belt Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- 1. Pull out the belt strap completely. jure a child in a child restraint system 2. Secure the child restraint system with when the airbags are activated. There is a the safety belt. risk of injury. Make sure that the front- 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and seat passenger airbags are deactivated and pull it tight against the child restraint that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- system. The safety belt is disabled. tor light lights up. Unlocking the safety belt Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle. front, knee and side airbags on the front 2. Remove the child restraint system. passenger side are deactivated. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com- Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags pletely. automatically, refer to page 156.

Seat position and height After installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 99

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

LATCH child restraint fixing tach only child restraint systems at the system corresponding attachment points.

General information Position LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil- Icon Meaning dren. Pay attention to the operating and safety in- The corresponding icon formation from the child restraint system shows the mounts for the manufacturer when installing and using lower LATCH anchors. LATCH child restraint fixing systems. Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a Mounts for the lower LATCH pair, (2), of LATCH symbols. anchors For vehicles equipped with a middle seat: General information It is not recommended to The lower anchors may be used to attach use the inner lower anchors the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com- of standard outer LATCH bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg positions to fasten a child when the child is restrained by the internal restraint system on the harnesses. middle seat. Use the vehicle safety belt instead for the Safety information middle seat.

Warning Before installing LATCH child restraint fixing systems If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are not correctly engaged, the protec- Pull the safety belt away from the area of tive effect of the LATCH child restraint the child restraint system. fixing system is limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that Assembly of LATCH child restraint the lower anchors are securely engaged fixing systems and that the LATCH child restraint fixing 1. Install child restraint system, see manu- system fits securely against the backrest. facturer's information. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are properly engaged. Warning The attachment points for child restraint systems in the vehicle are intended for attaching child restraint systems only. When other objects are mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. At-

99 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 100

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Child restraint systems with tether the rear seat backrest or the rear window strap shelf.

Safety information Routing the retaining strap

Warning If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes the upper anchor. 1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint Warning 3 Hook for upper retaining strap If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro- 4 Anchor tective effect of the child restraint system is limited or there is none. In certain situa- 5 Seat backrest tions, for instance braking maneuvers or 6 Upper retaining strap in case of an accident, the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the rear Attaching the upper retaining strap to backrests are locked. the anchor 1. Raise the head restraint, if needed. 2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain- Warning ing strap between or along both sides of The attachment points for child restraint the supports of the head restraint to the systems in the vehicle are intended for at- anchor. taching child restraint systems only. 3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to When other objects are mounted, the an- the anchor on the rear seat. chors can be damaged. There is a risk of 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it injury or risk of damage to property. At- down. tach only child restraint systems at the corresponding attachment points.

Anchors The respective icon shows the anchor for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper top tether are marked with this icon. It can be found on

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 101

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

Locking the doors and windows

Doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up. The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the rear. This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 80.

101 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 102

CONTROLS Driving

Driving

Vehicle features and options To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electrical consumers. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and Ignition off functions that are not necessarily available Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- button again without stepping on the clutch tions or country versions. This also applies pedal. to safety-related functions and systems. Steptronic transmission: shift to selector When using these functions and systems, lever position P, press the Start/Stop button the applicable laws and regulations must be again without stepping on the brake. observed. All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out. To save battery power when the engine is Start/Stop button off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electrical consumers. Concept Pressing the Start/Stop button Safety measures switches the ignition on or off The ignition is switched off automatically in and starts the engine. the following situations while the vehicle is Steptronic transmission: the stationary and the engine is off: engine starts in selector lever – When locking the vehicle, even if the position P or N with the brake pedal pressed low beams are switched on. when you press the Start/Stop button. – Shortly before the battery is discharged Manual transmission: the engine starts with completely, so that the engine can still the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/ be started. This function is only availa- Stop button is pressed. ble when the low beams are switched off. Ignition on – When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is un- Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop buckled and the low beams are switched button without stepping on the clutch off. pedal. – While the driver's safety belt is unbuck- Steptronic transmission: press the Start/ led with driver's door open and low Stop button, but do not press on the brake beams off. pedal at the same time. – When the front doors are opened if All vehicle systems are ready for operation. there is no other person sitting in the Most of the indicator/warning lights in the front seats. instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 103

Driving CONTROLS

– The low beams switch to parking lights – Shortly before the battery is discharged after some minutes of no use. completely, so that the engine can still Steptronic transmission: when switching off be started. the ignition, the selector lever position P is engaged automatically if the selector lever position R, D or M/S is engaged. Starting the engine

Radio-ready state Safety information General information DANGER In the radio-ready state, certain electrical consumers remain ready for operation. If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases Activating can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are color- With the engine running, press the Start/ less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex- Stop button. haust gases can also accumulate outside of If the engine is not running and the ignition the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep is switched on: the system automatically ac- the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient tivates radio-ready state when the door is ventilation. opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on. Radio-ready state remains active if, for in- Warning stance the ignition is automatically An unsecured vehicle can begin to move switched off for the following reasons: and possibly roll away. There is a risk of – Opening or closing the driver's door. accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- – Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. cle against rolling. – When automatically switching from low In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- beams to parking lights. cured against rolling away, follow the following: Switching off automatically – Set the parking brake. The radio-ready state is switched off auto- – On uphill grades or on a downhill matically in the following situations: slope, turn the front wheels in the di- – If the driver's or front passenger door is rection of the curb. opened when exiting the vehicle, with – On uphill grades or on a downhill the engine switched off manually. slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- – If the ignition is switched off manually stance with a wheel chock. with the Start/Stop button. – After approx. 8 minutes. NOTICE – When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system. Repeated attempts to start the vehicle or repeated starting of the vehicle in rapid succession can cause the starter to overheat. This also results in unburned or inad-

103 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 104

CONTROLS Driving

equately burned fuel, and can cause the Engine stop catalytic converter to overheat. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Avoid repeated starting Safety information of the vehicle, particularly repeated starting in rapid succession. Warning Unattended children or animals in the ve- Gasoline engine hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for in- Depending on the motorization, the full stance due to the following actions: drive power may not be available for approximately 30 seconds after starting the – Pressing the Start/Stop button. engine. In this case, the vehicle will not ac- – Releasing the parking brake. celerate as usual. – Opening and closing the doors or windows. Steptronic transmission – Engaging selector lever position N. Starting the engine – Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do 1. Depress the brake pedal. not leave children or animals unattended 2. Engage selector lever position P or N. in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with 3. Press the Start/Stop button. you when exiting and lock the vehicle. The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts. Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move Manual transmission and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- Starting the engine cle against rolling. 1. Depress the brake pedal. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the fol- 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to lowing: neutral. – Set the parking brake. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. – On uphill grades or on a downhill The ignition is activated automatically for a slope, turn the front wheels in the di- brief time and is stopped as soon as the en- rection of the curb. gine starts. – On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 105

Driving CONTROLS

Steptronic transmission Engine stop

Switching off the engine Functional requirements 1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply The engine is switched off automatically the parking brake. during a stop under the following condi- 2. Engage selector lever position P. tions: 3. Press the Start/Stop button. Manual transmission: The engine is switched off. – Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is not pressed. The radio-ready state is switched on. – The driver's safety belt is buckled or the Manual transmission driver's door is closed. Steptronic transmission: Switching off the engine – The selector lever is in selector lever position D. 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button. – The brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stopped. The engine is switched off. – The driver's safety belt is buckled or the The radio-ready state is switched on. driver's door is closed. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. In order to be able to release the brake 3. Set the parking brake. pedal, engage the selector lever in position P. The engine remains off. To continue driving depress the brake Auto Start/Stop function pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine starts automatically. Concept The air flow from the air conditioner is re- The Auto Start/Stop function helps save duced when the engine is switched off. fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, for instance in traffic jam or Steptronic transmission: manual at traffic lights. The ignition remains engine stop switched on. The engine starts automati- Depending on the vehicle equipment and cally for driving off. country version, the engine can be switched After each engine start using the Start/Stop off manually, if the engine was not switched button, the Auto Start/Stop function is off automatically when the vehicle stopped: ready and is activated at speeds faster than – Press the brake pedal forcefully again about 3 mph/5 km/h. from the current pedal position. Depending on the selected drive mode, refer – Engage selector lever position P. to page 180, the system is automatically ac- If all functional preconditions are fulfilled, tivated or deactivated. the engine switches off.

105 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 106

CONTROLS Driving

Displays in the instrument cluster – Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on. Instrument cluster without enhanced – The vehicle battery charge is very low. features: display – At higher elevations. The display indicates that the – The hood is unlocked. Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine – The parking assistant is activated. start. – Stop-and-go traffic. – Selector lever in selector lever position R, N or M/S. The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic engine stop have not been Starting the engine met. The engine starts automatically under the following conditions: – Manual transmission: clutch pedal is Instrument cluster with enhanced pressed. features: display – Steptronic transmission: by releasing The display indicates that the the brake pedal. Auto Start/Stop function is After the engine starts, accelerate as usual. ready for an Automatic engine start. Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, The display indicates that the it will not start again automatically if any conditions for an automatic one of the following conditions are met: engine stop have not been – The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and met. the driver's door is open. – The hood was unlocked. Functional limitations Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time. The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations: The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button. – Outside temperature too low. – The outside temperature is high and au- Functional limitations tomatic climate control is running. Even if driving off was not intended, the de- – The car's interior has not yet been activated engine starts up automatically in heated or cooled to the required level. the following situations: – The engine is not yet at operating tem- – Excessive warming of the car's interior perature. when air conditioning is switched on. – The wheels are at a sharp angle or the – When the steering wheel is turned. steering wheel is being turned. – Steptronic transmission: change from – After driving in reverse. selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 107

Driving CONTROLS

– Steptronic transmission: change from Switching the system on/off selector lever position P to R, N, D or M/S. Using the button – The vehicle begins rolling. – Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on. – The vehicle battery charge is very low. – Excessive cooling of the car's interior when the heating is switched on. – Manual transmission: low brake vacuum pressure; this can occur, for instance if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession. Press the button.

Additional Auto Start/Stop – LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function function is deactivated. Depending on the vehicle equipment and The engine is started during an auto- country-specific version, the vehicle fea- matic engine stop. tures a variety of sensors for assessing the The engine can only be stopped or traffic situation. The Auto Start/Stop func- started via the Start/Stop button. tion uses this information to adapt to various traffic situations in a proactive manner. – LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is activated. For instance, this applies to the following situations: Switching off the vehicle during an – When a situation is detected in which automatic engine stop the stopping time is expected to be very short, the engine is not switched off au- During an automatic engine stop, the vehi- tomatically. A message appears on the cle can be switched off permanently, for in- Control Display, depending on the situa- stance when leaving it. tion. Steptronic transmission: – When a situation is detected in which 1. Engage selector lever position P. the vehicle needs to drive off immedi- 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition ately, the engine is started automati- is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop cally. function is deactivated. The function may be restricted if the navigation data is invalid, outdated or not avail- 3. Set the parking brake. able, for example. Manual transmission: 1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. 3. Set the parking brake.

107 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 108

CONTROLS Driving

Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. Warning Automatic deactivation Unattended children or animals in the ve- In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop hicle can cause the vehicle to move and function is deactivated automatically for endanger themselves and traffic, for in- safety reasons, for instance if no driver is stance due to the following actions: detected. – Pressing the Start/Stop button. – Releasing the parking brake. Malfunction – Opening and closing the doors or The Auto Start/Stop function no longer windows. switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is – Engaging selector lever position N. possible to continue driving. Have the sys- – Using vehicle equipment. tem checked by a dealer's service center or There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do another qualified service center or repair not leave children or animals unattended shop. in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle. Parking brake, electric Overview Concept The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked. Safety information

Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of Parking brake accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- Setting cured against rolling away, follow the following: With a stationary vehicle – Set the parking brake. Pull the switch. – On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- The LED lights up. rection of the curb. The indicator light lights up red. The – On uphill grades or on a downhill parking brake is set. slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. Depending on the stopping situation, the parking brake is engaged automatically.

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 109

Driving CONTROLS

Steptronic transmission: in some parking – Engine on. situations, the parking brake is automati- – Gear position engaged. cally engaged, when selector lever position P is engaged. In these cases, the park- – Driver buckled in and doors closed. ing brake is released automatically when you leave the selector lever position P. Automatic release in cars with manual transmission While driving Drive off as usual. The parking brake disen- To use as emergency brake while driving: gages when the clutch pedal is released. The LED and indicator light go out. Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being Under the following conditions, the parking pulled. brake is automatically released: – Engine on. The indicator light lights up red, a – Gear engaged. signal sounds and the brake lights light up. – Driver buckled in and doors closed. A Check Control message is displayed. – Engine power is sufficient to drive off. If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete Malfunction stop, the parking brake is engaged. If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure the vehicle against rolling before ex- Releasing iting. A Check Control message is displayed. Releasing manually Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for 1. Switch on the ignition. instance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehicle. 2. Manual transmission: press the switch while the brake pedal is pressed. After a power failure Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or se- Re-activating the parking brake lector lever position P is set. 1. Switch on the ignition. The LED and indicator light go out. 2. Press the switch while stepping on The parking brake is released. the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set. Automatic release in cars with Steptronic transmission It may take several seconds for the brake to be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds as- For automatic release, step on the accelera- sociated with this process are normal. tor pedal. The indicator light in the instrument The LED and indicator light go out. cluster goes out as soon as the park- The parking brake is automatically released ing brake is ready for operation. when you step on the accelerator under the following conditions:

109 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 110

CONTROLS Driving

Turn signal, high beams, head- Malfunction light flasher Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Turn signal High beams, headlight flasher Using turn signals Press the lever forward or pull it backward.

Press the lever past the resistance point. – High beams on, arrow 1. Canada: the lever returns into its starting position after actuation. To switch off man- The high beams light up when the low ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance beams are switched on. point. – High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. Triple turn signal activation Lightly tap the lever up or down. Wiper system The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted. Via the Central Information Display (CID): General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is 1. "My MINI" dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or 2. "Vehicle settings" cause them to become worn more quickly. 3. "Lighting" Safety information 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. "One-touch turn signal" Warning 6. Select the desired setting. If the wipers start moving in the folded Settings are stored for the profile currently away state, body parts can be jammed or used. damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage Signaling briefly to property. Make sure that the vehicle is Press the lever to the resistance point and switched off when the wipers are in the hold it there for as long as you want the folded away state and the wipers are turn signal to flash. folded in when switching on.

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 111

Driving CONTROLS

Press the lever down. NOTICE – Switching off: press the lever down until If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, it reaches its standard position. the wiper blades can be torn off and the – Brief wipe: press the lever down from wiper motor can overheat when switching the standard position. on. There is a risk of damage to property, The lever automatically returns to its in- among other potential damage. Defrost the itial position when released. windshield prior to switching the wipers on. Interval mode or rain sensor

Switching on Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. With- out the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Press the lever up until the desired position Safety information is reached. – Resting position of the wipers, position 0. NOTICE – Intermittent operation or rain sensor, If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers position 1. can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to prop- – Normal wiper speed, position 2. erty, among other potential damage. Deac- – Fast wiper speed, position 3. tivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes. When travel is interrupted with the wiper system switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed. Activating Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1.

111 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 112

CONTROLS Driving

Wiping is started. cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti- The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. freeze, if needed. In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start. NOTICE Deactivating When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. Press the lever back into the standard posi- There is a risk of damage to property, tion. among other potential damage. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid Setting the frequency or sensitivity of reservoir is empty. the rain sensor Cleaning the windshield

Turn the thumbwheel. With deactivated rain sensor: set the interval. Pull the lever. With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen- The system sprays washer fluid on the sor sensitivity. windshield and activates the wipers briefly. Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor. Windshield washer nozzles Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the The washer jets are automatically heated rain sensor. whenever the ignition is switched on.

Windshield washer system Rear window wiper Overview Safety information

Warning The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 113

Driving CONTROLS

Switching on folded away state and the wipers are Turn the outer switch upward. folded in when switching on. – Resting position of the wiper, position 0. NOTICE – Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse gear is engaged, the system If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, switches to continuous operation. the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching Clean the rear window on. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Defrost the Turn the outer switch in the desired direc- windshield prior to switching the wipers tion. on. – In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position Folding away the wipers when released. 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. – In intermittent mode: turn the switch 2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un- further, arrow 2. The switch automati- til the wipers stop in a close to vertical cally returns to its interval position position. when released. The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low. Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield. Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is Folding down the wipers switched off when the wipers are in the After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

113 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 114

CONTROLS Driving

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the Switching on windshield. 2. Switch on the ignition. 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Canada: wiper system

General information Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point. Do not use the wipers if the windshield is – Normal wiper speed: tap up once. dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly. – Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point. Safety information The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released. Warning Switching off and brief wipe If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE Press the lever down. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, – To switch off from fast wiper speed: the wiper blades can be torn off and the press down twice. wiper motor can overheat when switching – To switch off from normal wiper speed: on. There is a risk of damage to property, press down once. among other potential damage. Defrost the – Brief wipe: press down once. windshield prior to switching the wipers on. The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 115

Driving CONTROLS

Interval mode or rain sensor Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. With- out the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset. Turn the thumbwheel. With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter- Safety information val. With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen- NOTICE sor sensitivity. If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the can accidentally start moving in vehicle rain sensor. washes. There is a risk of damage to prop- Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the erty, among other potential damage. Deac- rain sensor. tivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes. Windshield washer system Activating/deactivating Safety information

Warning The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed. Press the button on the wiper lever. Wiping is started. The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. NOTICE In frosty conditions, wiper operation may When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, not start. the wash pump cannot work as intended. If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen- There is a risk of damage to property, sor switched on: if the trip is resumed among other potential damage. Do not use within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor the washer system when the washer fluid is automatically activated again. reservoir is empty.

115 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 116

CONTROLS Driving

Cleaning the windshield – In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released. – In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released. The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low. Pull the lever. Fold-away position of the wipers The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly. Concept The fold-away position enables the wipers Windshield washer nozzles to be folded away from the windshield. The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on. General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or Rear window wiper under frosty conditions, for instance.

Overview Safety information

Warning If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on. Switching on Turn the outer switch upward. – Resting position of the wiper, posi- NOTICE tion 0. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, – Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re- the wiper blades can be torn off and the verse gear is engaged, the system wiper motor can overheat when switching switches to continuous operation. on. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Defrost the Clean the rear window windshield prior to switching the wipers on. Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 117

Driving CONTROLS

Folding away the wipers Washer fluid 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. Press the wiper lever up past the point General information of resistance and hold it for approx. All washer nozzles are supplied from one 3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a reservoir. nearly vertical position. Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used. Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter. Safety information

Warning 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield. Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children. United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allow- able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that Folding down the wipers apply. Follow the usage instructions on the After the wipers are folded back down, the washer fluid container. wiper system must be reactivated. Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con- 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the centrate or the equivalent is recom- windshield. mended. 2. Switch on the ignition. 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return Warning to their resting position and are ready again for operation. Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Only add washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid reservoir.

117 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 118

CONTROLS Driving

Manual transmission NOTICE Silicon-containing additives in the washer Safety information fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the washing system. There is a risk of damage to Warning property, among other potential damage. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move Do not add silicon-containing additives to and possibly roll away. There is a risk of the washer fluid. accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- NOTICE cured against rolling away, follow the fol- Mixing different windshield washer con- lowing: centrates or antifreeze can damage the – Set the parking brake. washing system. There is a risk of damage – On uphill grades or on a downhill to property, among other potential dam- slope, turn the front wheels in the di- age. Do not mix different windshield rection of the curb. washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the information and mixing ratios pro- – On uphill grades or on a downhill vided on the containers. slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Overview NOTICE When shifting to a lower gear, excessive speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.

Schematic diagram The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Malfunction The use of undiluted windshield washer concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to incorrect readings at temperatures below +5 ℉/-15 ℃.

– 1–6: forward gears.

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 119

Driving CONTROLS

– R: reverse gear. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the fol- Shifting lowing: – Set the parking brake. General information – On uphill grades or on a downhill Depending on the motorization, the engine slope, turn the front wheels in the di- speed during a shifting operation is ad- rection of the curb. justed automatically as required for harmo- – On uphill grades or on a downhill nious gear shifting. slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. Selector lever version To overcome the resistance push the gearshift lever dynamically to the left and en- Selector lever gage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement. Rolling or pushing the vehicle In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed. 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out The selector lever positions R, N, and D are of a forward gear or reverse. selected by tapping the selector lever for- 3. Release the parking brake. ward or back. The selector lever automatically returns to the center position when released. Steptronic transmission The selector lever position P is engaged by pressing the P button on the selector lever Concept or, in certain situations, automatically, refer to page 120. The Steptronic transmission combines the functions of an automatic transmission with the possibility of manual shifting, if needed. Selector lever positions

Safety information Drive mode D Selector lever position for normal vehicle Warning operation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

119 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 120

CONTROLS Driving

R is reverse Engaging selector lever positions Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary. General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after Neutral N you select a gear position, maintain pres- The vehicle may be pushed or roll without sure on the brake pedal until you are ready engine power in selector lever position N, to start. for instance in vehicle washes, refer to page 121. Functional requirements Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it Parking position P possible to change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position. General information Depending on the transmission version, the Selector lever position, for instance for engine may have to be running too. parking the vehicle. The selection lever position P cannot be The transmission blocks the drive wheels in changed until all technical requirements are selector lever position P. met. Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary. Engaging selector lever position D, N, Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that R selector lever position P is set. Otherwise, A selector lever lock prevents the following the vehicle may begin to move. faulty operation: – Unintentional shifting into selector Automatic parking position lever position R. Selector lever position P is engaged auto- – Unintentional shifting from selector matically in situations such as the follow- lever position P into another selector ing: lever position. – After the engine is switched off when 1. Press and hold the button to release the the vehicle is in the radio-ready state, selector lever lock. refer to page 103, or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 102, while selector lever position R, D or M/S is engaged. – If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and selector lever position D, M/S or R is engaged. – After the ignition has been switched off while selector lever position N is en- 2. With the driver's safety belt fastened, gaged. briefly push the selector lever in the desired direction, past a resistance point, if needed. The selector lever automati-

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 121

Driving CONTROLS

cally returns to the center position when 1. Start the engine while pressing on the released. brake pedal. 2. If necessary, release the parking brake. 3. Depress the brake pedal. 4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage selector lever position N. 5. Switch the engine off. In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check Control message is displayed. The vehicle can roll. Engaging selector lever position P Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever position P is automatically engaged after approx. 15 minutes. If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 123. Kickdown Press button P. Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full Rolling or pushing the vehicle throttle position. General information Sport program M/S In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance, Concept for instance in a car wash, or be pushed. The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for a sportier Engaging selector lever position N driving style. The transmission, for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are NOTICE shorter. Selector lever position P is automatically engaged when the ignition is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not switch ignition off in car washes.

121 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 122

CONTROLS Driving

Activating the Sport program Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance M1.

Shifting – To shift down: press the selector lever forward. – To shift up: pull the selector lever rear- wards. Press the selector lever to the left from se- The Steptronic transmission continues lector lever position D. shifting automatically in certain situations, The engaged gear is displayed in the instru- for instance when certain engine speed lim- ment cluster, for instance S1. its are reached. The sport program of the transmission is ac- When M2 is set manually while the vehicle tivated. is stationary, the transmission will no longer shift back to M1. This shifting behavior is retained until you engage M1 manually or Ending the Sport program exit M. Press the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Avoiding automatic upshifting Once a particular engine speed is attained, Manual mode M/S M/S manual mode is automatically up- shifted as needed. Concept John Cooper Works: once particular engine Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual speeds are attained, upshifting is not auto- mode. matically performed in M/S manual mode. For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmis- Activating manual mode sion, automatic shift operations are not per- 1. Press the selector lever to the left from formed if one of the following conditions is selector lever position D, arrow 1. met: – DSC is deactivated. – TRACTION is activated. In addition, there is no downshifting for kickdown. With the appropriate transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simultaneously activating kickdown and operating the left shift paddles. This is not possible by switching briefly via the shift 2. Press the selector lever forward or pull paddles from selector lever position D to it backward, arrows 2. manual mode M/S.

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 123

Driving CONTROLS

Ending the manual mode Shifting Press the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport transmission

Concept The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel. – Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle. – Shifting down: pull left shift paddle. General information – Downshifting to the lowest possible gear: keep the left shift paddle pulled. Shifting The selected gear is briefly displayed in the Gears will only be shifted at appropriate en- instrument cluster, followed by the current gine and road speeds, for instance down- gear. shifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high. Displays in the instrument cluster Short-term manual mode The selector lever position is In selector lever position D, actuating a displayed, for example P. shift paddle switches into manual mode temporarily. After conservative driving in manual mode without acceleration or shifting via the shift Releasing the transmission lock paddles for a certain amount of time, the electronically transmission switches back to automatic mode. General information It is possible to switch into automatic mode as follows: Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from a danger area. – Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle – In addition to the pulled right shift pad- from rolling away. dle, pull the left shift paddle. Engaging selector lever position N Continuous manual mode Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin In selector lever position S, actuating a shift the engine. paddle switches into manual mode permanently. 1. Press and hold down brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start.

123 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 124

CONTROLS Driving

3. Press the button on the selector lever, Functional requirements arrow 1, and press and hold the selector Launch Control is available as soon as the lever into selector lever position N, ar- engine and transmission are at operating row N, until selector lever position N is temperature. displayed in the instrument cluster. Depending on the outside temperature and A Check Control message is displayed. driving style, the engine and transmission require an interrupted trip of up to 30 miles/50 km in order to reach the operating temperature needed for Launch Con- trol.

Start with launch control While the engine is running:

1. Press button and select SPORT 4. Release the selector lever. with the MINI Driving Modes switch. 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter The instrument cluster displays TRAC- stops. TION in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF indicator light lights up. 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its 2. Engage selector lever position S. own. 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down For additional information, see the chapter on the brake. on tow-starting and towing. 4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the Steptronic Sport transmission: full throttle position, kickdown. Launch Control A destination flag is displayed in the instrument cluster. Concept 5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait Launch Control enables optimum accelera- briefly until the engine speed is con- tion on surfaces with good traction under stant. Keep accelerator pedal in this po- dry surrounding conditions. sition. 6. Release the brake within 3 seconds after General information the destination flag illuminates. The use of Launch Control causes prema- The vehicle accelerates. ture component wear since this function Upshifting occurs automatically as long represents a very heavy load for the vehicle. as the destination flag is displayed and Do not use Launch Control during the the accelerator pedal is not released. break-in, refer to page 234, period. Do not turn the steering wheel when driv- Repeated use during a trip ing away with Launch Control. After Launch Control has been used, the transmission must cool down for approx.

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 125

Driving CONTROLS

5 minutes before Launch Control can be used again.

After using Launch Control To increase driving stability, activate DSC Dynamic Stability Control again.

System limits An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

125 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 126

CONTROLS Displays

Displays

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: overview

1 Tachometer 134 4 Fuel gauge 133 2 Indicator/warning lights 5 Display/reset miles 134 3 Speedometer 6 Electronic displays 128

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 127

Displays CONTROLS

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: overview

1 Tachometer 134 4 Vehicle speed 2 Display/reset miles 134 5 Indicator/warning lights 3 Electronic displays 129 6 Fuel gauge 133

127 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 128

CONTROLS Displays

Instrument cluster without additional functions: electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems Trip computer 139 Messages, for instance Check Control 2 Selector lever position 119 Time 134 Gear shift indicator 136 Outside temperature 134 3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta- Selection lists 138 tus 180 Total miles/trip odometer 134

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 129

Displays CONTROLS

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: electronic displays

1 Selector lever position 119 5 Messages, for instance Check Control Gear shift indicator 136 Selection lists 138 2 Time 134 Navigation instructions MINI Driving Modes switch sta- 6 Total miles/trip odometer 134 tus 180 Trip computer 139 3 Driver assistance systems 4 Outside temperature 134 Range 135

Check Control In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control Display. Concept The Check Control system monitors func- Indicator/warning lights tions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. General information The indicator/warning lights can light up in General information a variety of combinations and colors. A Check Control message is displayed as a Several of the lights are checked for proper combination of indicator or warning lights functioning and light up temporarily when and text messages in the instrument cluster the engine is started or the ignition is and in the Head-up Display. switched on.

129 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 130

CONTROLS Displays

Red lights Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the ve- Safety belt reminder hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela- tively high differential speed. Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: safety belt on the driver or Intervene by braking or make an evasive passenger side is not buckled. The maneuver. safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger Pedestrian Warning seat. If a collision with a detected person Make sure that the safety belts are posi- is imminent, the icon lights up and a tioned correctly. signal sounds.

Airbag system Instrument cluster without enhanced Airbag system and belt tensioner features: orange lights may not be working. Have the vehicle checked immedi- Active Cruise Control ately by a dealer's service center or another The number bars shows the selected qualified service center or repair shop. distance from the vehicle driving ahead. Parking brake, electric Camera-based cruise control, refer to The parking brake is set. page 183. For releasing the parking brake, refer to page 109. Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle Brake system has been detected ahead of you. Braking system impaired. Continue Indicator light flashes: the condi- to drive moderately. tions are not adequate for the system to work. Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or The system was deactivated but applies the another qualified service center or brakes until the driver actively resumes repair shop. control of the vehicle by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. Forward Collision Warning Yellow lights Indicator light illuminates: advance warning is issued, for example when Antilock Braking System ABS there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle The Brake Assistant function may ahead is too small. not activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer braking distance Increase the distance. into account.

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 131

Displays CONTROLS

Have the system immediately checked by a The indicator light flashes and is then illu- dealer's service center or another qualified minated continuously: flat tires or tire pres- service center or repair shop. sure losses cannot be detected. – Interference caused by systems or devi- DSC Dynamic Stability Control ces with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the The indicator light flashes: DSC con- system automatically becomes active trols the drive and braking forces. again. The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify your driving style to the – TPM was unable to complete the reset. driving circumstances. Reset the system again. The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal- – A wheel without TPM wheel electronics functioned. is mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified Have the system checked by a dealer's serv- service center or repair shop as needed. ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. – Malfunction: have the system checked by a dealer’s service center or another DSC, refer to page 178. qualified service center or repair shop. Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 158. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated Steering system DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti- Steering system may not be working. vated. Have the system checked by a deal- DSC, refer to page 178, and DTC, re- er's service center or another quali- fer to page 179. fied service center or repair shop.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM Emissions The FTM signals a loss of tire infla- – The warning light lights up: tion pressure in a tire. Emissions are deteriorating. Reduce your speed and stop cau- Have the vehicle checked as soon tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering as possible. maneuvers. – The warning light flashes under certain Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 163. circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Reduce the vehicle speed and have the The indicator light illuminates: the system checked immediately; otherwise, Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low serious engine misfiring within a brief tire inflation pressure or a flat tire. period can seriously damage emission Follow the information in the Check Control control components, in particular the message. catalytic converter.

131 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 132

CONTROLS Displays

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to The indicator light flashes: the set speed page 280. limit has been exceeded. If this happens, a signal sounds. Green lights Reduce speed or deactivate system.

Turn signal Lane departure warning Turn signal switched on. The indicator light lights up: the sys- Unusually rapid flashing of the indi- tem is activated. At least one lane cator light indicates that a turn sig- marking was detected and warnings nal bulb has failed. can be issued. Turn signal, refer to page 110. Lane departure warning, refer to page 172.

Parking lights, headlight Blue lights Parking lights or headlights are switched on. High beams Parking lights/low beams, headlight High beams are switched on. control, refer to page 148. High beams, refer to page 110.

Front fog lights Hiding Check Control messages Front fog lights are switched on. Front fog lights, refer to page 151.

High-beam Assistant High-beam Assistant is switched on. High beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the traffic situation. High-beam Assistant, refer to page 150. Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Cruise control Continuous display The system is switched on. It main- Some Check Control messages are displayed tains the speed that was set using continuously and are not cleared until the the control elements on the steering malfunction is eliminated. If several mal- wheel. functions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively. Speed Limiter The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis- The indicator light illuminates: the played again automatically. system is switched on.

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 133

Displays CONTROLS

Temporary display 3. Tilt the Controller to the left. Some Check Control messages are hidden 4. "Check Control" automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The 5. Select the desired text message. Check Control messages are stored and can be displayed again later. 6. Select the desired setting. Displaying stored Check Control Messages after trip completion messages Certain messages displayed while driving Via the Central Information Display (CID): are displayed again after the ignition is switched off. 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" Fuel gauge 3. Tilt the Controller to the left. 4. "Check Control" Concept 5. Select the text message. The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed. Display General information Check Control Vehicle tilt position may cause the display At least one Check Control message to vary. is displayed or stored. Information on refueling, refer to page 246.

Text messages Instrument cluster without Text messages in combination with a icon enhanced features: display in the instrument cluster explain a Check The arrow beside the fuel Control message and the meaning of the in- pump icon shows which side dicator/warning lights. of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can Instrument cluster with enhanced be called up via Check Control. features: display With urgent messages the added text will The arrow beside the fuel be automatically displayed on the Control pump icon shows which side Display. of the vehicle the fuel filler Depending on the Check Control message, flap is on. further help can be selected. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status"

133 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 134

CONTROLS Displays

Indicator light in the instrument – When the ignition is switched on, the cluster trip odometer is reset. The yellow indicator light illuminates, once the fuel reserve is reached. Outside temperature

General information Tachometer If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal sounds. Always avoid engine speeds in the red A Check Control message is displayed. warning field. In this range, the fuel supply There is an increased risk of ice on roads. is reduced to protect the engine. Safety information Odometer and trip odometer Warning Concept Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃ there can be a risk of icy roads, for in- The total mileage driven and the mileage stance on bridges or shady sections of the driven since the last reset are displayed in road. There is a risk of accident. Modify the instrument cluster. your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures. Instrument cluster without additional functions: reset trip distance Display Press the button. The outside temperature is displayed in the instrument – The odometer is displayed cluster. when the ignition is switched off. – When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset. Time

Instrument cluster with enhanced The time is displayed in the features: reset trip distance instrument cluster. Press the button. Set the time on the Central In- formation Display (CID), refer – The odometer is displayed to page 48. when the ignition is switched off.

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 135

Displays CONTROLS

Date Displaying the cruising range Via the Central Information Display (CID): The date is displayed in the in- 1. "My MINI" strument cluster. 2. "System settings" Set the date on the Central In- formation Display (CID), refer 3. "Displays" to page 48. 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Range" Range Current consumption General information When the remaining range is low: Concept – A Check Control message is displayed Displays the current fuel consumption. briefly. Check whether you are currently driving in – The remaining range is shown on the an efficient and environmentally-friendly trip computer. manner. – With a sporty driving style, for instance fast cornering, the engine function is Displaying the current not always ensured. consumption The Check Control message appears contin- Via the Central Information Display (CID): uously below a range of approx. 1. "My MINI" 30 miles/50 km. 2. "System settings" Safety information 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" NOTICE 5. "Current consumption" With a driving distance of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are Service notifications not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Refuel promptly. Concept The function displays the service notifications and the corresponding maintenance Display scopes. The current range is displayed in the instrument cluster. General information After the ignition is switched on the instrument cluster briefly displays available driv-

135 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 136

CONTROLS Displays

ing distance or time to the next scheduled Via the Central Information Display (CID): maintenance. 1. "My MINI" A service advisor can read out the current service notifications from your vehicle key. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Tilt the Controller to the left. Display 4. "Service required" Detailed information on service 5. "Vehicle inspection" notifications 6. "Date:" More information on the type of service re- 7. Select the desired setting. quired may be displayed on the Control Dis- play. Automatic Service Request Via the Central Information Display (CID): Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections is automati- 1. "My MINI" cally transmitted to your dealer’s service 2. "Vehicle status" center before your vehicle is due for serv- 3. Tilt the Controller to the left. ice. 4. "Service required" You can check when your dealer’s service center was notified. Maintenance work and legally mandated inspections are displayed. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 5. Select an entry to call up detailed infor- 1. "My MINI" mation. 2. "Vehicle status" Symbols 3. Tilt the Controller to the left. 4. "Teleservice Call" Symbols Description No service is currently required. Gear shift indicator

The time for recommended Concept maintenance or a legally The system recommends the most efficient mandated inspection is ap- gear for the current driving situation. proaching. Service interval is exceeded. General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the Steptronic Entering appointment dates transmission and with manual transmission. Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle Suggestions to shift up or down are dis- inspections. played in the instrument cluster. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 137

Displays CONTROLS

Manual transmission: displaying from the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation. Example Description With the navigation system, the system Efficient gear is set. takes into account the information stored in the navigation data and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs. Depending on the equipment version, shift to a more effi- Safety information cient gear. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as- Steptronic transmission: displaying sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic Example Description closely and actively intervene where ap- Efficient gear is set. propriate.

Depending on the equipment Overview version, shift to a more efficient gear. Camera

Speed Limit Info

Concept The camera is installed near the interior Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi- mirror. mum permitted speed in the instrument Keep the windshield in front of the interior cluster. mirror clean and clear. General information The camera at the base of the interior mir- Display ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic Limit Info is displayed permanently in the signs with extra symbols for wet road con- instrument cluster or via the trip computer. ditions, etc., are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as

137 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 138

CONTROLS Displays

– When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc. – In the event of incorrect detection by the camera. – If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect. – In areas not covered by the navigation system. Press button on the turn signal lever several times, if needed. – When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing. Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instru- – When passing buses or trucks with a ment cluster. speed sticker. – If the traffic signs are non-conforming. Speed Limit Info – When traffic signs that are valid for a The last speed limit detected. parallel road are detected. – During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.

With navigation system: Selection lists Speed Limit Info is not available. General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, the buttons on the steering wheel and the dis- Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in play in the instrument cluster can be used the Head-up Display. to display or use the following: System limits – Current audio source. The system may not be fully functional and – Phone redial. may provide incorrect information in the – Turn on voice activation system. following situations: – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. – When traffic signs are fully or partially concealed by objects, stickers or paint. – When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. – When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections.

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 139

Displays CONTROLS

Activating a list and adjusting the Trip computer setting Concept Button on the Function steering wheel The trip computer displays different vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver- Move selection up. age values.

Move selection Calling up information down. Confirm the selection.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Press the button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever Instrument cluster with enhanced calls up the following informa- features: display tion:

– Range. – GREEN Info. When GREEN Mode is activated. – Average consumption, fuel. – Average consumption since delivery from the factory. – Current consumption, fuel. – Average speed. – Date. – Engine temperature display. – With equipment version with Head-up Display and navigation:

139 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 140

CONTROLS Displays

Distance to destination. GREEN info When destination guidance is activated The achieved range extension may be dis- in the navigation system. played as a bonus range. – With equipment version with Head-up Display and navigation: Average consumption Arrival time. The average consumption is calculated for When destination guidance is activated the period while the engine is running. in the navigation system. The average consumption is calculated for – Instrument cluster without enhanced the distance traveled since the last reset by features: the trip computer. Speed Limit Info. Average speed – Vehicle speed. Periods in which the vehicle is parked with – Trip odometer. the engine manually stopped are not in- The unit of some information can be cluded in the calculation of the average changed. speed. Setting units, refer to page 49. Resetting average values Selecting information Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select what information from the trip computer can be accessed in the instrument cluster. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" Press and hold the button on the turn signal lever. 4. "Instrument panel" 5. Select the desired setting. Engine temperature display Settings are stored for the profile currently used. Concept The current engine temperature, based on a Information in detail combination of coolant and engine oil temperature is displayed. As soon as the opti- Range mum operating temperature has been at- Displays the estimated cruising range avail- tained, the indicator is in the center able with the remaining fuel. position. The range is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 141

Displays CONTROLS

General information The distance to the destination is adopted If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en- automatically. gine, become too hot, a Check Control message is displayed too. Time of arrival When the engine temperature is too Depending on the vehicle equipment, the high, a red indicator light is dis- estimated time of arrival is displayed if a played. destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started. When the engine oil temperature is The time must be correctly set. too high, a red indicator light is displayed. Instrument cluster without additional functions: Speed Limit Info To check the coolant level, refer to page 277. Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument Instrument cluster without enhanced cluster. features: display Trip computer on the Control Display

Concept The trip computer displays different vehicle data on the Control Display, such as average values.

General information Two types of trip computers are available Instrument cluster with enhanced on the Control Display: features: display – "Onboard info": average values, such as the consumption, are displayed. The values can be reset individually. – "Trip computer": the values deliver an overview of a specific route and can be reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the trip computer or onboard computer Via the Central Information Display (CID): Distance to destination 1. "My MINI" Depending on the vehicle equipment, the 2. "Driving information" distance remaining to the destination is dis- 3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" played if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started.

141 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 142

CONTROLS Displays

Resetting the trip computer 1. "My MINI" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 2. "Technology in action" 1. "My MINI" 3. "Sport displays" 2. "Driving information" 4. "Sports instruments" 3. "Onboard info" Via MINI Driving Modes switch: 4. "Consumption" or "Speed" 1. Activate SPORT. 5. "OK" 2. "Sport displays" Resetting the trip computer 3. "Sports instruments" Via the Central Information Display (CID): Vehicle state 1. "My MINI" 2. "Driving information" General information The following vehicle and surrounding area 3. "Trip computer" data is automatically checked and evaluated 4. Move the Controller to the left, if in succession: needed. – Range. – "Reset": all values are reset. – Engine temperature. – "Automatic reset": all values are – Outside temperature. reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come to a standstill. – SPORT program state. 5. If necessary, "OK" Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle state is displayed.

Driving Excitement Checking vehicle state Via the Central Information Display (CID): Concept 1. "My MINI" On the Control Display, sport instruments 2. "Technology in action" can be displayed, and the vehicle state can 3. "Sport displays" be checked before the use of the SPORT program. 4. "Vehicle and surroundings" Via the MINI Driving Modes switch: Sport instruments 1. Activate SPORT. General information 2. "Sport displays" On the Control Display, values for power 3. "Vehicle and surroundings" and torque are displayed.

Displaying sport instruments Via the Central Information Display (CID):

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 143

Displays CONTROLS

Speed warning LED ring on the central instrument cluster Concept The system can be used to set a speed limit. Concept A warning will be issued when this speed The LED ring displays light animations to limit is exceeded. represent specific functions.

General information Basic displays The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed Basic functions, for instance the tachome- exceeds the set speed limit again, after it ter, can be set to be displayed continually if has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h. so desired.

Adjusting Event displays Via the Central Information Display (CID): Functions that are only displayed tempora- 1. "My MINI" rily, for instance the volume or temperature settings, can be set as event displays. 2. "Vehicle settings" Several vehicle assistance functions can 3. "Speed warning" also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis- 4. "Warning at:" play corresponds with the displays of the function in the respective display. 5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is displayed. Example: tachometer 6. Press the Controller. Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster, the light animations of the tachometer's Activating/deactivating basic display show the current RPMs and Via the Central Information Display (CID): the respective RPM warning thresholds.

1. "My MINI" Display 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Speed warning" 4. "Speed warning"

Setting your current speed as the speed warning Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" – Arrow 1: current RPM. 3. "Speed warning" – Arrow 2: prewarning field. 4. "Select current speed" – Arrow 3: warning field.

143 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 144

CONTROLS Displays

Switching on/off LED ring Head-up Display Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" Concept 2. "System settings" This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, for instance 3. "Displays" the speed. 4. "Center Instrument" The driver can get information without 5. "Center Instrument" averting his or her eyes from the road.

Adjusting the LED ring General information Via the Central Information Display (CID): Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up Display. For additional informa- 1. "My MINI" tion, see the chapter on care. 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" Safety information 4. "Center Instrument" Warning 5. "Basic display" or "Event display" When extending and retracting the projec- 6. Select the desired setting. tion screen of the Head-up Display, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in- Setting the brightness jury. Make sure that the area of movement The brightness can be adjusted when night of the projection screen is clear during lighting is active in the instrument cluster. opening and closing. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" NOTICE 2. "System settings" The Head-up Display consists of sensitive 3. "Displays" components that can easily be scraped or damaged. There is a risk of damage to 4. "Center Instrument" property, among other potential damage. 5. "Brightness at night" Do not place any objects on the Head-up 6. Turn the Controller until the desired Display, attach to system components or brightness is set. plug into the system. Do not move the moving parts manually. 7. Press the Controller. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 145

Displays CONTROLS

Overview Selecting displays in the Head-up Display Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Displayed information" 6. Select the desired displays in the Head- Switching the Head-up Display up Display. on/off Settings are stored for the driver profile When switching on, the projection lens of currently used. the Head-up Display is extended. When switching off, the projection lens of the Setting the brightness Head-up Display is retracted again. The brightness is automatically adjusted to Via the Central Information Display (CID): the ambient brightness. The basic setting can be adjusted manually. 1. "My MINI" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 2. "System settings" 1. "My MINI" 3. "Displays" 2. "System settings" 4. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Displays" 5. "Head-Up Display" 4. "Head-Up Display" Display 5. "Brightness" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired Overview brightness is set. The following information is displayed on 7. Press the Controller. the Head-up Display: When the low beams are switched on, the – Vehicle speed. brightness of the Head-up Display can be – Navigation instructions. additionally influenced using the instru- – Check Control messages. ment lighting, refer to page 152. – Selection list from the instrument clus- The setting is stored for the driver profile ter. currently used. – Driver assistance systems. Adjusting the height Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings"

145 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 146

CONTROLS Displays

3. "Displays" John Cooper Works: sport dis- 4. "Head-Up Display" plays in the Head-up Display 5. "Height" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired General information height is reached. The sport displays in the Head-up Display 7. Press the Controller. assist with a sporty driving style. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used. Switching on The height of the Head-up Display can also Via the Central Information Display (CID): be stored using the memory function, refer 1. "My MINI" to page 91. 2. "System settings" Setting the rotation 3. "Displays" The screen of the Head-up Display can be 4. "Head-Up Display" rotated around its own axis. 5. "Displayed information" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 6. "Sport displays" 1. "My MINI" With navigation system: if the sport dis- 2. "System settings" plays are switched on, no navigation con- 3. "Displays" tent will be displayed on the Head-up Dis- play. 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Rotation" Display 6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is selected. 7. Press the Controller. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by the following factors: 1 Vehicle speed – Certain seat positions. 2 Shift point indicator – Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis- 3 Gear display play. 4 Current engine speed – Sunglasses with certain polarization fil- 5 Warning field, speed ters. – Wet roads. – Unfavorable light conditions.

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 147

Displays CONTROLS

Shift point indicator Information at a glance

Concept Symbols Description The shift point indicator in the Head-up "Flat Tire Monitor": status of Display indicates the optimum shifting the run-flat tires, refer to point. Thus, with a sporty driving style, the page 163. best possible vehicle acceleration is achieved. "Tire Pressure Monitor": status of the Tire Pressure Functional requirements Monitor TPM, refer to page 158. – Steptronic Sport transmission: Manual mode M/S and, if necessary, Dy- "Engine oil level": electronic namic Traction Control DTC are acti- engine oil level check, refer vated. to page 273. – Press the accelerator pedal all the way "Check Control": Check Con- down. trol messages are stored in the background and can be Display displayed on the Control Display. Displaying stored Successive gray illuminated fields indicate Check Control messages, re- the upcoming shift moment. fer to page 133. Shift up immediately when the red fields light up. "Service required": displaying service notifications, re- When the maximum speed is reached, the fer to page 135. entire display flashes red and the fuel supply is interrupted in order to protect the en- "Teleservice Call": Tele- gine. service Call.

Vehicle status

General information The status can be displayed and actions performed for several systems. Going to the vehicle status Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Tilt the Controller to the left.

147 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 148

CONTROLS Lights

Lights

Vehicle features and options Icon Function Parking lights. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and Low beams. functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies Instrument lighting. to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights Overview General information Switches in the vehicle Position of switch: , , If the driver's door is opened when the ignition is switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off. Parking lights Position of switch: The vehicle is illuminated on all sides. Do not use the parking lights for extended The light switch element is located next to periods; otherwise, the battery may become the steering wheel. discharged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. Icon Function When parking, switch on the one-sided Front fog lights. roadside parking light, refer to page 149. Low beams Automatic headlight control. Position of switch: Cornering light. The low beams light up when the ignition is switched on. Lights off. Daytime running lights.

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 149

Lights CONTROLS

Canada: roadside parking light 3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" Concept 5. "Welcome lights" The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. The setting is stored for the driver profile Switching on currently used. Pathway lighting

General information The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlight flasher is switched on after the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched off.

Setting the duration With radio-ready state switched off, press Via the Central Information Display (CID): the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" Switching off 3. "Lighting" Briefly press the lever to the resistance 4. "Exterior lighting" point in the opposite direction. 5. "Pathway lighting" 6. Set length of time. Welcome lights and pathway The setting is stored for the driver profile lighting currently used.

Welcome lights Automatic headlight control General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and Concept the ambient brightness, individual light The low beams are switched on and off au- functions may be switched on briefly when tomatically depending on the ambient the vehicle is unlocked. brightness, for example in tunnels, in twi- light or if there is precipitation. Activating/deactivating Position of switch: , General information Via the Central Information Display (CID): A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" Activating Position of switch:

149 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 150

CONTROLS Lights

The indicator light in the instrument cluster Cornering light is illuminated when the low beams are switched on. General information System limits Position of switch: The automatic headlight control cannot In tight curves, for instance on mountain- serve as a substitute for your personal judg- ous roads or when turning, an additional, ment of lighting conditions. cornering light is switched on that lights up For example, the sensors are unable to de- the inside of the curve when the vehicle is tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa- moving below a certain speed. tions, switch the lights on manually. The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig- Daytime running lights nals. When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may be automatically switched on re- General information gardless of the steering angle. Switch position: – , – Depending on the national-market ver- Adaptive headlight range con- sion: trol The daytime running lights light up when the ignition is switched on. The adaptive headlight range control fea- Depending on the national-market version: ture balances out acceleration and braking after switching off the ignition, the parking processes as well as the vehicle load condi- lights will illuminate in position . tions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized. Activating/deactivating In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to High-beam Assistant deactivate the daytime running lights. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Concept 1. "My MINI" The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic participants early on and automatically 2. "Vehicle settings" switches the high beams on or off depend- 3. "Lighting" ing on the traffic situation. 4. "Exterior lighting" General information 5. Select the desired setting. The high-beam Assistant ensures that the Settings are stored for the currently used high beams are switched on, whenever the vehicle key. traffic situation allows. In the low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system.

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 151

Lights CONTROLS

The system responds to light from oncom- The system is not fully functional in the fol- ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, lowing situations, and driver intervention and to ambient lighting, for instance in may be necessary: towns and cities. – In very unfavorable weather conditions, The high beams can be switched on and off such as fog or heavy precipitation. manually at any time. – When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback Activating/deactivating riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings. – In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres- sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob- scured oncoming traffic on highways. – In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the presence of highly reflective signs. – When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- Position of switch, depending on the vehicle ered with stickers, etc. equipment: , Press the button on the turn signal lever. Fog lights The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low Front fog lights beams are switched on. The headlights are automatically switched Concept between low beams and high beams. The front fog lights work alongside the low The blue indicator light in the instru- beams to illuminate a wider area of the ment cluster lights up when the sys- roadway. tem switches on the high beams. Functional requirement The high-beam Assistant is deactivated – Low beams are switched on. when manually switching the high beams on and off, refer to page 110. Switching on/off To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever. Press the button. The green indicator light lights up if System limits the front fog lights are switched on. The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a If the automatic headlight control, refer to substitute for the driver's personal judg- page 149, is activated, the low beams will ment of when to use the high beams. In sit- come on automatically when you switch on uation that require this, therefore switch off the front fog lights. manually.

151 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 152

CONTROLS Lights

When the high beams or headlight flasher Overview are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on.

Instrument lighting

Functional requirement The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to set the brightness. 1 Interior lights Adjusting 2 Reading lights Adjust the brightness with the 3 Ambient light thumbwheel. Switching the interior lights on/off Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button Interior lights and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

General information Switching the reading lights on and Depending on the equipment, the interior off manually lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour- Press the button. tesy lights are controlled automatically. The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting The reading lights are located in the front controls brightness of some of these fea- next to the interior light. tures. Ambient light

General information Depending on the equipment version, lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the car's interior.

Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting"

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 153

Lights CONTROLS

4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Ambient lighting" 6. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Changing color Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.

Press the switch forward or backward and hold for approx. 3 seconds until the Ambient Light flashes several times: automatic color change. Push the switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightness Depending on the equipment, the brightness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Brightness" 6. Adjust the brightness.

153 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 154

CONTROLS Safety

Safety

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag 3 Head airbag

Front airbags Side airbag Front airbags help protect the driver and In the event of a side impact, the side air- the front passenger by responding to frontal bag protects the side of the body in the impacts in which safety belts alone would chest and lap area. not provide adequate protection.

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 155

Safety CONTROLS

Head airbag shoulder rests against the backrest In the event of a side impact, the head air- when crossing the hands and the upper bag protects the head. body is as far back as possible while still maintaining a comfortable grip on the Ejection Mitigation steering wheel. – Make sure that the front passenger is The head airbag system is designed as an sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her ejection mitigation countermeasure to re- feet and legs in the floor area and does duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle not support them on the dashboard. occupants through side windows during rollovers or side impact events. – Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag. Knee airbag – There should be no additional persons, The knee airbag protects the legs in the animals or objects between an airbag event of a frontal impact. and a person. – Dashboard and windshield on the front Protective effect passenger side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive labels or coverings and Airbags are not triggered in every impact do not attach brackets or cables, for in- situation, for instance in less severe acci- stance for GPS devices or mobile dents or rear-end collisions. phones. Information on optimum effect of the – Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag cover panels, do not cover them airbags or modify them in any way. – Do not use the cover of the front airbag Warning on the front passenger side as a storage If the seat position is incorrect or the de- area. ployment area of the airbags is impaired, – Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions the airbag system cannot provide protec- or other objects to the front passenger tion as intended and may cause additional seat that are not specifically suited for injuries due to triggering. There is a risk seats with integrated side airbags. of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in- – Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as formation on achieving the optimum pro- jackets, over the backrests. tective effect of the airbag system. – Never modify either the individual com- – Keep a distance from the airbags. ponents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel – Always grasp the steering wheel on the covers, the dashboard, and the seats. steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to – Do not remove the airbag system. keep the risk of injury to your hands or Even when you follow all instructions very arms as low as possible when the airbag closely, injury from contact with the airbags is triggered. cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa- – Adjust seat and steering wheel so that tions. hands can be crossed over the steering wheel. Select the settings so that the

155 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 156

CONTROLS Safety

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to Airbag system malfunctioning short-term and, in most cases, temporary – Warning light does not come on when hearing impairment in sensitive occupants. the ignition is switched on. Vehicle modifications for a person with dis- – The warning light lights up continu- abilities may affect the air bag system; con- ously. tact MINI Customer Relations for further information. Automatic deactivation of the Warnings and information on the airbags front-seat passenger airbags are also found on the sun visors. Concept Functional readiness of the airbag The system reads if the front passenger seat system is occupied by measuring the human body's resistance. Safety information Front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger's side are activated or deacti- Warning vated. Individual components can be hot after triggering of the airbag system. There is a General information risk of injury. Do not touch individual Before transporting a child on the front pas- components. senger seat, refer to the safety information and instructions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children. Warning Improperly executed work can lead to fail- Safety information ure, malfunction or unintentional triggering of the airbag system. In the case of a Warning malfunction, the airbag system might not To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag trigger as intended despite the accident function, the system must be able to de- severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan- tect whether a person is sitting in the ger to life. Have the airbag system front passenger seat. The entire seat cush- checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap- ion area must be used for this purpose. ped by a dealer’s service center or another There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. qualified service center or repair shop. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the floor area. Correct function When the ignition is switched on, Malfunction of the automatic the warning light in the instrument deactivation system cluster lights up briefly and thereby When transporting older children and indicates the operational readiness of the adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may entire airbag system and the belt tensioner. be deactivated in certain seat positions. In this case, the indicator light for the front- seat passenger airbags lights up.

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 157

Safety CONTROLS

In this case, change the seat position so – The indicator light does not light up that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac- when, for instance a correctly seated tivated and the indicator light goes out. person of sufficient size is detected on If it is not possible to activate the airbags, the seat. The airbags on the front pas- have the person sit in the rear. senger side are activated. To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion. Detected child restraint systems – Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats The system generally detects children or other items to the front passenger seated in a child restraint system, particu- seat unless they are specifically deter- larly in child restraint systems required by mined to be safe for use on the front NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi- passenger seat. cle was manufactured. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the – Do not place any electronic devices on indicator light for the front-seat passenger the front passenger seat if a child re- airbags lights up. This indicates that the straint system is to be installed on it. child restraint system has been detected – Do not place objects under the seat that and the front-seat passenger airbags are not could press against the seat from below. activated. – No moisture in or on the seat. Strength of the driver's and front- Indicator light for the front-seat seat passenger airbag passenger airbags The explosive power that activates driver's/ front-seat passenger airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control message is displayed. A message also appears on the Control Display.

The indicator light for the front-seat passen- Calibrating the front seats ger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags. Warning The light indicates whether the airbags are There is a risk of jamming when moving either activated or deactivated. the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the – The indicator light lights area of movement of the seat is clear prior up when a child is properly to any adjustment. seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is An appropriate Check Control message is empty. The airbags on the displayed. front passenger side are not activated.

157 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 158

CONTROLS Safety

1. Move the respective seat all the way for- – After the tire inflation pressure was ad- ward. justed to a new value, a reset was performed. 2. Move the respective seat forward again. The seat moves forward briefly. – Wheels with TPM wheel electronics. 3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi- Status display tion. The calibration procedure is completed Current status when the Check Control message disap- pears. The system status can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys- If the message continues to be displayed, tem is active. repeat the calibration. Via the Central Information Display (CID): If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked 1. "My MINI" as soon as possible. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The current status is displayed. Tire conditions Concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure General information in the four mounted tires. The system warns Tire and system status are indicated by the you if there is a significant loss of pressure color of the wheels and a text message on in one or more tires. the Control Display.

General information All wheels green Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire System is active and will issue a warning re- inflation pressure and, depending on the lated to the tire inflation pressures stored model, the tire temperature. during the last reset. Further information and instructions on using the system can also be found under Tire One to four yellow wheels inflation pressure, refer to page 250. A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pressure has occurred in the indicated tires. Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for Gray wheels the system; otherwise, reliable message of a It may not be possible to identify tire infla- loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: tion pressure losses. – After a tire or wheel replacement, a re- Possible causes: set was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure. – Malfunction. – The system is being reset.

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 159

Safety CONTROLS

Additional information Safety information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures. Warning The values shown are instantaneous meas- A damaged regular tire with low or miss- urements and may vary depending on driving tire inflation pressure impacts han- ing style or weather conditions. dling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited Resetting the system stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not Via the Central Information Display (CID): continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information 1. "My MINI" on run-flat tires and continued driving 2. "Vehicle status" with these tires. 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" 4. Start the engine but do not drive off. If a tire inflation pressure check is 5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform required reset". 6. Drive away. Message The wheels are displayed in gray and the A icon with a Check Control message ap- following is displayed "Resetting Tire pears on the Control Display. Pressure Monitor…". Icon Possible cause After a travel time of several minutes, the The system has detected a wheel set tire inflation pressures are accepted as change, but no reset was done. reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically while driving. No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warn- After successful completion of the reset, the ing based on the tire inflation tires appear in green on the Control Display pressures stored during the last and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label reset. for recommended pressures." is displayed. Inflation was not carried out ac- You may interrupt this trip at any time. cording to specifications. When you continue the reset resumes automatically. The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last Messages reset.

General information Measure A low tire inflation pressure may cause the 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be needed. switched on. 2. Reset the system.

159 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 160

CONTROLS Safety

If the tire inflation pressure is too low Icon Possible cause

Message There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. A yellow warning light is illuminated No reset was performed for the in the instrument cluster. system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation In addition, a icon with a Check Control pressures stored during the last message appears on the Control Display. reset. Icon Possible cause There is a tire inflation pressure Measure loss. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. No reset was performed for the Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- system. The system issues a warn- neuvers. ing based on the tire inflation 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with pressures stored during the last normal tires or run-flat tires. reset. Run-flat tires, refer to page 259, are labeled with a circular icon containing the Measure letters RSC marked on the tire's side- 1. Reduce your speed and drive moder- wall. ately. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. Actions in the event of a flat tire 2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas station, check and correct the tire infla- Normal tires tion pressure in all four tires, if neces- 1. Identify the damaged tire. sary. To do this, check the tire inflation pres- 3. Reset the system. sure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. If there is a significant loss of tire If the tire inflation pressure in all four inflation pressure tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tor may not have been reset. In this Message case, perform the reset. A yellow warning light is illuminated If the tire inflation pressure in all four in the instrument cluster. tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this In addition, a icon with the affected tire ap- case, initialize the system. pears in a Check Control message on the If identification of flat tire damage is Control Display. not possible, please contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 161

Safety CONTROLS

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire ing distance may be less but may also be kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. more if an economical driving style is used. In this case, have the electronics checked If the vehicle is loaded with an average and replaced at the next opportunity. weight and used under favorable conditions, the distance for which it may be safe to Run-flat tires drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Safety information Vehicle handling with damaged tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will Warning handle differently, potentially leading to The vehicle handles differently when a conditions such as the following: run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire – Greater likelihood of swerving off pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- course. ity when braking, braking distances are – Longer braking distances. longer and the self-steering properties will – Changed self-steering properties. change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt 50 mph/80 km/h. steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Maximum speed Final tire failure You may continue driving with a damaged Vibrations or loud noises while driving can tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of Continued driving with a flat tire the tire could come loose and cause an acci- If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: dent. 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s neuvers. service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. System limits 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. Temperature If the tire inflation pressure in all four The tire inflation pressure depends on the tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tire's temperature. tor may not have been reset. In this Driving or exposure to the sun will increase case, perform the reset. the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure. Possible driving distance with a depressurized tire The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the These circumstances may cause a warning vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road when temperatures fall very sharply. conditions, outside temperature. The driv-

161 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 162

CONTROLS Safety

Sudden tire pressure loss bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different The system cannot indicate sudden serious size than the size indicated on the vehicle tire damage caused by external circumstan- placard or tire inflation pressure label, you ces. should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety Failure performing a reset feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system The system does not function properly if a (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure reset has not been carried out, for instance telltale when one or more of your tires is a flat tire is reported though tire inflation significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, pressures are correct. when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires Malfunction as soon as possible, and inflate them to the The yellow warning light flashes and proper pressure. Driving on a significantly is then illuminated continuously. A under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- Check Control message is displayed. heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla- It may not be possible to identify tire pres- tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire sure losses. tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han- Examples and recommendations in the fol- dling and stopping ability. Please note that lowing situations: the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- – A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even for instance an emergency wheel, is if under-inflation has not reached the level mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire service center or another qualified serv- pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been ice center or repair shop as needed. equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica- – Malfunction: have system checked by a tor to indicate when the system is not oper- dealer’s service center or another quali- ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi- fied service center or repair shop. cator is combined with the low tire pressure – The system was unable to complete the telltale. When the system detects a mal- reset. Perform a system reset again. function, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain contin- – Interference caused by systems or devi- uously illuminated. This sequence will ces with the same radio frequency: after continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups leaving the area of the interference, the as long as the malfunction exists. When the system automatically becomes active malfunction indicator is illuminated, the again. system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal- Declaration according to NHTSA/ functions may occur for a variety of rea- FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring sons, including the installation of replace- System ment or alternate tires or wheels on the Each tire, including the spare (if provided) vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func- should be checked monthly when cold and tioning properly. Always check the TPMS inflated to the inflation pressure recom- malfunction telltale after replacing one or mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en- vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la- sure that the replacement or alternate tires

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 163

Safety CONTROLS

and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to Initialization required function properly. An initialization must be performed in the following situations: – After the tire inflation pressure has Flat Tire Monitor FTM been adjusted. – After a tire or wheel replacement. Concept The system detects tire inflation pressure Performing initialization loss on the basis of rotation speed differen- When initializing, the set tire inflation ces between the individual wheels while pressures serve as reference values in order driving. to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, by confirming the tire inflation pressures. the diameter and therefore the rotational Do not initialize the system when driving speed of the corresponding wheel changes. with tire chains. The difference will be detected and reported as a flat tire. Via the Central Information Display (CID): The system does not measure the actual in- 1. "My MINI" flation pressure in the tires. 2. "Vehicle status" Functional requirements 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" The following conditions must be met for 4. Start the engine but do not drive off. the system; otherwise, reliable message of a 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: reset". – After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini- 6. Drive away. tialization was performed with the cor- The initialization is completed while driv- rect tire inflation pressure. ing, which can be interrupted at any time. – After the tire pressure was adjusted to a The initialization automatically continues new value, an initialization was per- when driving continues. formed. Messages Status display The current status of the flat tire monitor General information can be displayed, for instance whether the When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic RPA is active. Stability Control is switched on, if needed. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" Safety information 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" Warning A damaged regular tire with low or miss- The status is displayed. ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited

163 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 164

CONTROLS Safety

stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not may not have been initialized. In this continue driving if the vehicle is equipped case, initialize the system. with normal tires. Follow the information If identification of flat tire damage is on run-flat tires and continued driving not possible, please contact a dealer’s with these tires. service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Indication of a flat tire 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel. A yellow warning light is illuminated Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire in the instrument cluster. kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked In addition, a icon with a Check Control and replaced at the next opportunity. message appears on the Control Display. Icon Possible cause Run-flat tires There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. Safety information

Warning Measure The vehicle handles differently when a 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- neuvers. ity when braking, braking distances are 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with longer and the self-steering properties will normal tires or run-flat tires. change. There is a risk of accident. Drive Run-flat tires, refer to page 259, are la- moderately and do not exceed a speed of beled with a circular icon containing the 50 mph/80 km/h. letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. Maximum speed Actions in the event of a flat tire You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Normal tires Continued driving with a flat tire 1. Identify the damaged tire. If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, for instance using 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. neuvers. If the tire inflation pressure in all four 2. Do not exceed a speed of tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- 50 mph/80 km/h. tor may not have been reset. In this 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all case, perform the reset. four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 165

Safety CONTROLS

may not have been initialized. In this nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation case, initialize the system. pressure regularly. – Sudden serious tire damage caused by Possible driving distance with a external circumstances cannot be recog- depressurized tire nized in advance. The distance for which it may be possible to – When the system has not been initial- drive safely varies depending on how the ized. vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, outside temperature. The driv- – When driving on a snowy or slippery ing distance may be less but may also be road surface. more if an economical driving style is used. – Sporty driving style: spinning traction If the vehicle is loaded with an average wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift- weight and used under favorable conditions, ing). the distance for which it may be safe to – When driving with tire chains. drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires Intelligent Safety Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to Concept conditions such as the following: Intelligent Safety enables central operation – Greater likelihood of swerving off of the driver assistance systems. course. The intelligent safety systems can help pre- – Longer braking distances. vent an imminent collision. – Changed self-steering properties. – Forward Collision Warning with city Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt collision mitigation, refer to page 166. steering maneuvers or driving over obsta- – Pedestrian Collision Warning with City cles, for instance curbs or potholes. Collision Mitigation, refer to page 170. – Lane departure warning, refer to Final tire failure page 172. Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Safety information Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Warning Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s The system cannot serve as a substitute service center or another qualified service for the driver’s personal judgment in as- center or repair shop. sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving System limits style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- The system could be delayed or malfunction propriate. in the following situations: – A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recog-

165 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 166

CONTROLS Safety

Press button briefly: Warning – The menu for the Intelligent Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a Safety system is displayed. The substitute for the driver’s personal judg- systems are individually ment. Due to its limits, the system may not switched off according to their issue warnings or reactions, or these may respective settings. be issued late or in a manner that is not – LED lights up orange or goes out respec- consistent with their normal use. There is tive to their individual settings. a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to Adjust the settings as needed. The individ- traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely ual settings are stored for the driver profile and actively intervene where appropriate. currently in use.

Press button again: Warning – All Intelligent Safety systems Due to system limits, individual functions are switched on. can malfunction during tow-starting/ – The LED lights up green. towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Hold down button: Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off – All Intelligent Safety systems prior to tow-starting/towing. are switched off. – The LED goes out. Overview Button in the vehicle Forward Collision Warning with city light braking function

Concept The system may prevent some accidents. In the event of an accident, the system may reduce impact speed. The system sounds a warning before an im- Intelligent Safety button minent collision and activates brakes independently, if needed. The Brake Intervention function activates Switching on/off and applies the brakes with limited force Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto- and duration. matically active after every departure. Some A camera at the base of the interior mirror Intelligent Safety systems activate accord- controls the system. ing to the last setting. The Forward Collision Warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 167

Safety CONTROLS

With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally, the Forward Collision Warning Warning and brake intervention are delayed Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a in order to avoid false system reactions. substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not General information issue warnings or reactions, or these may The system warns at two levels of an immi- be issued late or in a manner that is not nent danger of collision at speeds from ap- consistent with their normal use. There is prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn- a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to ings may vary with the current driving traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely situation. and actively intervene where appropriate. If necessary, a brake intervention will occur. Depending on the equipment and national-market version, the brake interven- Warning tion will occur up to approx. Due to system limits, individual functions 35 mph/60 km/h or up to approx. can malfunction during tow-starting/ 35 mph/60 km/h. towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Detection range Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Objects that the system can detect are taken into account.

Safety information

Warning Intelligent Safety button The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

167 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 168

CONTROLS Safety

Camera – The LED goes out.

Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via the Central Information Display (CID). 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Intelligent Safety" 4. "Warning time" The camera is installed near the interior mirror. 5. Select the desired setting. Keep the windshield in front of the interior The selected warning time is stored for the mirror clean and clear. driver profile currently in use.

Switching on/off Warning with braking function Display Switching on automatically A warning symbol appears in the instru- The system is automatically active when the ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if a vehicle is turned on. collision with a detected vehicle is imminent. Switching on/off manually Icon Measure Press button briefly: – The menu for the Intelligent Icon lights up red: prewarning. Safety system is displayed. The Brake and increase distance. systems are individually switched off according to their Symbol flashes red and an acous- respective settings. tic signal sounds: acute warning. – LED lights up orange or goes out respec- Brake and make an evasive ma- tive to their individual settings. neuver, if necessary. Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile Prewarning currently in use. This warning is provided, for instance when there is impending danger of a collision or Press button again: the distance to the vehicle ahead is too – All Intelligent Safety systems small. are switched on. If a prewarning is provided, respond by – The LED lights up green. braking as warranted.

Hold down button: Acute warning with braking function – All Intelligent Safety systems An acute warning is displayed when there are switched off. is an imminent danger of collision due to

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 169

Safety CONTROLS

the vehicle approaching another object at a accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- high speed. tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the The driver must intervene actively when information in this Owner’s Manual re- there is an acute warning. If necessary, the garding the scope of the system’s opera- driver is assisted by a minor automatic tion and limitations. brake intervention in a possible risk of collision. Detection range Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning. The system's detection potential is limited. Thus, a system reaction might not come or Brake intervention might come late. The warning prompts the driver to inter- The following situations may not be de- vene. While a warning is active, the maxi- tected, for example: mum braking force is used when the brake – Slow moving vehicles when you ap- is applied. In order to activate the Brake As- proach them at high speed. sistant function, you must apply the brakes – Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low – Vehicles with an unusual rear appear- speed, the vehicle may come to a complete ance. stop. – Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. Manual transmission: during a brake intervention up to a complete stop, the engine Functional limitations may be shut down. The system may be limited in the following The driver may interrupt the braking inter- situations: vention function by stepping on the acceler- – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- ator pedal or by actively moving the steer- fall. ing wheel. – In tight curves. The system’s ability to detect objects may – If the field of view of the camera or the be limited in some circumstances. Refer to windshield is dirty or covered. the information in this Owner’s Manual re- – If the driving stability control systems garding the limitations of the system and are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. actively intervene as warranted. – Up to 10 seconds after the start of the System limits engine via the Start/Stop button. – During calibration of the camera imme- Safety information diately after vehicle delivery. – If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, for instance Warning from the sun low in the sky. The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to Warning sensitivity conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of The more sensitive the warning settings are, the more warnings are displayed.

169 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 170

CONTROLS Safety

Therefore, there may also be an excess of – Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and premature or unjustified warnings and reac- left of the central area. tions. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located Pedestrian Collision Warning within the extended area only if they are with City Collision Mitigation moving in the direction of the central area.

Concept Safety information The system may prevent some accidents with pedestrians. Warning When driving at city speeds, the system The system cannot serve as a substitute will issue a warning if there is imminent for the driver’s personal judgment in as- risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup- sessing visibility and traffic situation. port this with a light braking function. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving The camera at the base of the interior mir- style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic ror controls the system. closely and actively intervene where appropriate. General information In sufficiently bright conditions, the system issues a warning of a possible risk of colli- Warning sion with pedestrians in the speed range Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. substitute for the driver’s personal judg- 35 mph/60 km/h ment. Due to its limits, the system may not The system reacts to people who are within issue warnings or reactions, or these may the detection range of the system. be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is Detection range a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off The detection area in front of the vehicle is prior to tow-starting/towing. divided into two areas: – Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 171

Safety CONTROLS

Overview switched off according to their respective settings. Button in the vehicle – LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings. Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again: – All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. – The LED lights up green. Intelligent Safety button Hold down button: – All Intelligent Safety systems Camera are switched off. – The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function

Display If a collision with a detected person is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Dis- play. The camera is installed near the interior The red icon is displayed and a sig- mirror. nal sounds. Keep the windshield in front of the interior Intervene immediately by braking or mirror clean and clear. make an evasive maneuver.

Switching on/off Brake intervention The warning prompts the driver to inter- Switching on automatically vene. While a warning is active, the maxi- The system is automatically active when the mum braking force is used when the brake vehicle is turned on. is applied. In order to activate the Brake As- sistant function, you must apply the brakes Switching on/off manually quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of Press button briefly: collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low – The menu for the Intelligent speed, the vehicle may come to a complete Safety system is displayed. The stop. systems are individually

171 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 172

CONTROLS Safety

Manual transmission: during a brake inter- – Pedestrians having a body size less than vention up to a complete stop, the engine 32 in/80 cm. may be shut down. The driver may interrupt the braking inter- Functional limitations vention function by stepping on the acceler- The system may be limited or may not be ator pedal or by actively moving the steer- available in the following situations: ing wheel. – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- The system’s ability to detect objects may fall. be limited in some circumstances. Refer to – In tight curves. the information in this Owner’s Manual regarding the limitations of the system and – If the field of view of the camera or the actively intervene as warranted. windshield is dirty or covered. – If the driving stability control systems System limits are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. – Up to 10 seconds after the start of the Safety information engine via the Start/Stop button. – During calibration of the camera imme- Warning diately after vehicle delivery. The system is designed to operate in cer- – If there are constant blinding effects be- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to cause of oncoming light, for instance conditions or other factors, the system from the sun low in the sky. may not respond. There may be a risk of – When it is dark outside. accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner’s Manual re- Lane departure warning garding the scope of the system’s operation and limitations. Concept The lane departure warning alerts when the Detection range vehicle on roads with lane markings is The detection potential of the camera is lim- about to leave the lane. ited. Thus, a warning might not be issued or be General information issued late. Depending on the country version, the sys- The following situations may not be de- tem issues a warning at speeds between tected, for example: 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h. – Partially covered pedestrians. Warnings are issued by means of a steering wheel vibration. The time of the warning – Pedestrians that are not detected as may vary depending on the current driving such because of the viewing angle or situation. contour. The system does not provide a warning if – Pedestrians outside of the detection the turn signal is set before leaving the range. lane.

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 173

Safety CONTROLS

Safety information Camera

Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing road and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in response to a warning. The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior Warning mirror clean and clear. Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judg- Switching on/off ment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may Switching on automatically be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is The lane departure warning is automatically a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to activated after departure, if the function traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely was switched on the last time the engine and actively intervene where appropriate. was stopped. Switching on/off manually Overview Press button briefly: Button in the vehicle – The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings. – LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings. Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Intelligent Safety button Press button again: – All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. – The LED lights up green.

173 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 174

CONTROLS Safety

Hold down button: garding the scope of the system’s opera- – All Intelligent Safety systems tion and limitations. are switched off. – The LED goes out. Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following Display in the instrument cluster situations: The icon illuminates green: at least – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- one lane marking was detected and fall. warnings can be issued. – In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction Issued warning areas. If you leave the lane – When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel vi- – In tight curves or on narrow lanes. brates. – When lane markings are covered by ob- If the turn signal is switched on before jects. changing the lane, a warning is not issued. – When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. End of warning – When driving toward bright lights. The warning is canceled in the following – When the windshield in front of the in- situations: terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- – Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. ered with stickers, etc. – When returning to your own lane. – During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery. – When braking hard. – When using the turn signal. Manual Speed Limiter System limits

Safety information Concept The system can be used to set a speed limit, for instance to prevent the vehicle from ex- Warning ceeding speed limits. The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to General information conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of The system can limit the speed, starting at a accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the be driven at any speed below the set speed information in this Owner’s Manual re- limit.

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 175

Safety CONTROLS

Exceeding the speed limit When the speed limit is switched on, DSC When necessary, the speed limit can be in- Dynamic Stability Control is switched on as tentionally overcome by stepping on the well, if needed. gas. Switching off When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit, a warning is issued. Press the button on the steering wheel. No brake intervention The system switches off automatically in If the set speed limit is reached or uninten- the following situations, for example: tionally exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the vehicle is not actively braked. – When shifting into reverse gear. When the speed limit is set during a trip to – When the engine is switched off. a value below the driving speed, the vehicle – When cruise control is switched on. coasts until its driving speed drops below – On activation of Dynamic Traction Con- the set speed limit. trol DTC or deactivation of DSC. The displays go out. Overview Changing the speed limit Steering wheel buttons, left or button: press up or down repeatedly until the desired speed limit is set. Button Function – or button: each time it is pressed System on/off. to the resistance point, the speed limit increases or decreases by 1 mph, Increase the speed limit. 1 km/h. – or button: each time it is pressed Reduce the speed limit. past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ 10 km/h. Operation When the speed limit is set during a trip to a value below the current speed, the vehicle Switching on coasts until it drops to the set speed limit. Press the button on the steering Exceeding the speed limit wheel. The speed limit can be exceeded intention- The current speed is accepted as the speed ally. There is no acoustic warning in this limit. case. If the system is switched on while the vehi- Press the accelerator pedal all the way down cle is stationary or driving at low speeds, to intentionally exceed the set speed limit. 20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit. When the vehicle speed drops below the set The set speed is displayed under the LIMIT speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti- or LIM indicator. vated.

175 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 176

CONTROLS Safety

Warning when the speed limit is Fatigue alert exceeded Concept Visual warning The system can detect decreasing alertness If the set speed limit is exceeded, the LIMIT or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto- or LIM indicator flashes while the vehicle nous trips, for instance on highways. In this speed is greater than the speed limit. situation, it is recommended that the driver takes a break. Acoustic warning – If the speed limit is exceeded uninten- Safety information tionally, a signal sounds. – When the speed limit is reduced to be- Warning low the vehicle speed while driving, a signal sounds after approx. 30 seconds. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as- – When the speed limit is intentionally sessing one's physical state. An increasing exceeded by stepping on the accelerator lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de- pedal all the way down, there is no sig- tected or not be detected in time. There is nal. a risk of accident. Make sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving Displays in the instrument cluster style to traffic conditions. Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Function The desired speed is displayed under the LIMIT indicator. The system is switched on each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off. Instrument cluster with en- After travel has begun, the system monitors hanced features: certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so The desired speed is displayed that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be under the LIM indicator. detected. This procedure takes the following criteria – The indicator does not light up: the sys- into account: tem is switched off. – Personal driving style, for instance – The indicator lights up green: the sys- steering behavior. tem is active. – Driving conditions, for instance time, – Display flashes green: set speed limit ex- length of trip. ceeded. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a rec- Displays in the Head-up Display ommendation to take a break. The information from the Speed Limiter can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. Break recommendation If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Dis-

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 177

Safety CONTROLS

play with the recommendation to take a At standstill break. After coming to a halt, the brake is released A recommendation to take a break is dis- automatically. Secure the vehicle against played only once during an uninterrupted rolling. trip. After a break, another recommendation to Harder vehicle braking take a break cannot be displayed until after In certain situations, it can be necessary to approximately 45 minutes. bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake Assistant allows. System limits To do this, quickly apply extra force to the The function may be limited in the follow- brake. For a brief period, the braking pres- ing situations and may issue an incorrect sure will be higher than the braking pres- warning or no warning at all: sure that is achieved by the automatic brak- – When the time is set incorrectly. ing function. This interrupts automatic – When the vehicle speed is mainly below braking. about 43 mph/70 km/h. – With a sporty driving style, such as dur- Interrupting automatic braking ing rapid acceleration or when corner- It can be necessary to interrupt automatic ing fast. braking in certain situations, for instance – In active driving situations, such as for an evasive maneuver. when changing lanes frequently. Interrupt automatic braking: – When the road surface is poor. – By pressing the brake pedal. – In the event of strong side winds. – By pressing the accelerator pedal. The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a break during longer trips on highways.

PostCrash – iBrake

Concept In the event of an accident, the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without intervention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof.

177 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 178

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options DSC Dynamic Stability Control

This chapter describes all standard, country- Concept specific and optional features offered with Within the physical limits, the system helps the series. It also describes features and to keep the vehicle on a steady course by functions that are not necessarily available reducing engine speed and by applying in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- brake intervention to the individual wheels. tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, General information the applicable laws and regulations must be DSC detects the following unstable driving observed. conditions, for instance: – Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer- ing. Antilock Braking System ABS – Loss of traction of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering. ABS prevents locking of the wheels during Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to braking. page 179, is a version of the DSC where The vehicle maintains its steering power drive power is optimized. even during full brake applications, which increases the active safety. Safety information ABS is ready when the drive-ready state is switched on. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as- Brake assistant sessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independ- When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys- ently react to all traffic situations. There is tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak- a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to ing capability to the furthest possible ex- traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely tent. It reduces the braking distance to a and actively intervene where appropriate. minimum during an emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the capabilities provided by the Antilock Brake System ABS. Warning Do not reduce the pressure on the brake When driving with a roof load, for in- pedal for the duration of the emergency stance with roof-mounted luggage rack, stop. the vehicle's center of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tip- ping in critical driving situations. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 179

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy- Automatic activation namic Stability Control when driving with When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa- roof load. tion occurs in the following situations: – The vehicle has a flat tire. Indicator/warning lights – When activating cruise control in the The indicator light flashes: DSC con- TRACTION or DSC OFF settings. trols the drive and braking forces. The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned. DTC Dynamic Traction Con- trol Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF Concept General information DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil- When DSC is deactivated, driving stability ity Control where drive power is optimized. is reduced during acceleration and when The system ensures maximum drive power driving in curves. on unusual road conditions, for instance To increase driving stability, activate DSC unplowed snow covered roads, or loose road again as soon as possible. surfaces, but with somewhat limited driving stability. Deactivating DSC When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maximum traction. Driving stability is lim- Press and hold this button but not ited during acceleration and when driving longer than approx. 10 seconds, un- in curves. til the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the instrument cluster and dis- Drive carefully. plays DSC OFF. You may find it useful to briefly activate DSC is switched off. DTC under the following special circumstances: – When driving in slush or on uncleared, Activating DSC snow-covered roads. Press the button. – When driving off from deep snow or DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator loose ground. light go out. – When driving with tire chains.

Indicator/warning lights Deactivating/activating DTC When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis- Dynamic Traction Control played in the instrument cluster. Activating DTC The indicator light lights up: DSC is deactivated. Press the button.

179 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 180

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument Programs cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up. MID/GREEN Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for Deactivating DTC more comfort. Press the button again. SPORT TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator light go out. Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorbers for greater driving agility.

Performance Control MINI Driving Modes switch

Performance Control enhances the agility of Concept the vehicle. The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to To increase maneuverability, wheels are fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features. braked individually when a sporty driving style is used. Choose between three different programs. Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will activate the particular program. ALL4 Operating the programs ALL4 is the all-wheel-drive system of your Switch Program vehicle. Concerted action by ALL4 and DSC Dynamic Stability Control further optimizes SPORT traction and driving dynamics. The ALL4 MID all-wheel-drive system variably distributes the driving forces to the front and rear axles GREEN as demanded by the driving situation and road surface. MID Adaptive chassis MID provides balanced tuning. With each starting operation, MID is activated using the Start/Stop button. Concept The tuning of the chassis can be changed GREEN with the system. The system offers several different pro- Concept grams. GREEN provides consistent tuning to maxi- The programs are selected via the MINI mize range. Driving Modes switch.

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 181

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

Activating GREEN Configuring SPORT Press the MINI Driving Modes switch Via the Central Information Display (CID): downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster. 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" Configuring GREEN 3. If necessary, "Driving mode" Via MINI Driving Modes switch 4. "Configure SPORT" 1. Activate GREEN. 5. Select the desired setting. 2. "Configure GREEN" This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is activated. 3. Configure the program. This configuration is retrieved when Configuring driving program GREEN is activated. Settings can be made for the following driving programs in Drive mode: Via the Central Information Display (CID) – GREEN, refer to page 180. 1. "My MINI" – SPORT, refer to page 181. 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Driving mode" Displays 4. "Configure GREEN" Program selection 5. Select the desired setting. This configuration is retrieved when Pressing the MINI Driving GREEN is activated. Modes switch displays a list of programs, which can be se- SPORT lected.

Concept Selected program Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for greater driving agility. The instrument cluster displays the selected program. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tuning of the chassis and suspension also changes and SPORT can be individually configured. The configuration is stored for the driver profile currently in use. Drive-off assistant Activating SPORT Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up- Concept ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru- This system supports driving off on uphill ment cluster. grades. The parking brake is not required.

181 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 182

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

Driving off with the drive-off assistant 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic

Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steering function. The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance, and makes steering firmer when driving at faster speeds. Furthermore, the steering force adapts according to the driving program, so that a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 183

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options General information A camera on the interior mirror is used to This chapter describes all standard, country- detect vehicles driving ahead. specific and optional features offered with Depending on the settings, the cruise con- the series. It also describes features and trol settings may change under certain con- functions that are not necessarily available ditions. in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies Safety information to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be Warning observed. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the Camera-based cruise control limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to Concept traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely Using this system, a desired speed and a and actively intervene where appropriate. distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed on Warning clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or The desired speed can be incorrectly ad- brakes automatically. justed or called up by mistake. There is a If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys- risk of accident. Adjust the desired speed tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is closely and actively intervene where ap- maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as propriate. the given situation allows. The distance can be adjusted in several steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the Warning respective speed. Risk of accident due to too high speed dif- With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic ferences to other vehicles, for instance in transmissions: if the vehicle ahead of you the following situations: brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive – When fast approaching a slowly mov- again shortly thereafter, the system is able ing vehicle. to detect this within the given system limits. – Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane. – When fast approaching standing vehicles.

183 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 184

CONTROLS Driving comfort

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's Watch traffic closely and actively inter- series, optional features and country speci- vene where appropriate. fications.

Camera Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: – Set the parking brake. – On uphill grades or on a downhill The camera is installed near the interior slope, turn the front wheels in the di- mirror. rection of the curb. Keep the windshield in front of the interior – On uphill grades or on a downhill mirror clean and clear. slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. Functional requirements The system is best used on well-constructed Overview roads. The system is functional at speeds begin- Buttons on the steering wheel ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic Button Function transmissions: the system can also be acti- Cruise control on/off, refer to vated while the vehicle is stationary. page 185. The max. speed that can be set is Pause cruise control, refer to 85 mph/140 km/h. page 185. Manual transmission: Active Cruise Control Continue cruise control with the is interrupted below a speed of approx. last setting, refer to page 186. 20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not brake to a stop. Reduce distance, refer to If distance control is switched off, refer to page 186. page 187, higher desired speeds can be se- Increase the distance, refer to lected as well. page 186. Increase speed, refer to page 185. Reduce speed, refer to page 185.

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 185

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Switching on/off and interrupting With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic cruise control transmission: when canceling while stationary, depress the brake pedal simultaneously. Switching on Press the button on the steering Interrupting automatically wheel. The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: Instrument cluster without enhanced – When the driver applies the brakes. features: – Manual transmission: when the clutch Display in the instrument cluster pedal is depressed for a few seconds or lights up. released while a gear is not engaged. Instrument cluster without enhanced – If selector lever position N is set. features: – Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti- Display in the instrument cluster vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control lights up. The current speed is adopted as is deactivated. desired speed and displayed with icon. – If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter- venes. Instrument cluster with en- – If the detection range of the camera is hanced features: impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy Display in the instrument precipitation or glare effects from the cluster lights up. The current sun. speed is adopted as desired – Manual transmission: if the vehicle in speed and displayed with icon. front decelerates below a speed of ap- Cruise control is active and maintains the prox. 20 mph/30 km/h. set speed. – With the Stop&Go function for Step- DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched tronic transmissions: following a sta- on, if necessary. tionary period of approx. 3 seconds, after the vehicle was braked to a stop by Switching off the system. With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic Setting the speed transmissions: when switching off while stationary, depress the brake pedal simulta- Maintaining/storing the speed neously. Press or button in the interrupted Press the button on the steering state. wheel. When the system is switched on, the cur- The displays go out. The stored desired rent speed is maintained and stored as the speed is deleted. desired speed. Instrument cluster without enhanced Interrupting manually features: Press the button on the steering wheel.

185 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 186

CONTROLS Driving comfort

The stored speed is displayed by the icon in Reduce distance the Info Display of the instrument cluster. Press the button repeatedly until Instrument cluster with en- the desired distance is set. hanced features: Instrument cluster without enhanced The stored speed is displayed. features: The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the Info Display of the in- DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched strument cluster. on, if necessary.

Changing the speed Increase the distance or button: press until the desired Press the button repeatedly until speed is set. the desired distance is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when Instrument cluster without enhanced the road is clear. features: – or button: each time it is pressed The set distance is briefly displayed to the point of resistance, the desired in the left part of the Info Display of the in- speed increases or decreases by approx. strument cluster. 1 mph/1 km/h. – or button: each time it is pressed Continuing cruise control past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ General information 10 km/h. An interrupted cruise control can be contin- or button: hold down to repeat the ued by calling up the stored speed. action. Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large Adjusting the distance before calling up the stored speed. Other- wise, unintentional braking or accelerating Safety information may occur. In the following cases, the stored speed Warning value is deleted and cannot be called up The system cannot serve as a substitute again: for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to – When the system is switched off. the system limits, braking can be late. – When the ignition is switched off. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic Calling up the stored speed and situation at all times. Adjust the distance distance to the traffic and weather conditions and maintain the prescribed safety distance, Press the button with the system in- possibly by braking. terrupted. Cruise control is continued with the stored values. The in-

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 187

Driving comfort CONTROLS

strument cluster briefly displays the – Display lights up green: system is active, selected distance. the display indicates the desired speed. – Display lights up orange: system is in- Switching distance control on/off terrupted, the display indicates the stored speed. Safety information – No display: system is switched off. Instrument cluster with en- Warning hanced features: The system does not react to traffic driv- – Display lights up green: ing ahead of you, but instead maintains system is active, the dis- the stored speed. There may be a risk of play indicates the desired accident or risk of damage to property. Ad- speed. just the desired speed to the traffic condi- – Speed value is illuminated gray: system tions and brake as needed. is interrupted. – No display: system is switched off. Switching distance control off If no speed is indicated, it is possible that Distance control can be switched off and on the conditions necessary for operation are when driving with cruise control activated. not currently fulfilled. Press and hold this button. Distance to vehicle ahead of you Or: Distance display Press and hold this button. Distance 1

The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up. Distance 2

To switch distance control back on, press one of the two buttons again briefly. Distance 3 After changing over distance control, a Check Control message is displayed. Distance 4 Displays in the instrument cluster This value is set automatically after the system is switched on. Desired speed and stored speed Instrument cluster without enhanced Instrument clusters without enhanced fea- features: tures: selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left In addition to the indicator light, the hand portion of the Info Display. desired speed is displayed in the Info Dis- play.

187 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 188

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Detected vehicle System interrupted without detected vehicle. Instrument cluster without enhanced features: System interrupted with detected ve- Icon lights up orange: a vehicle has hicle. been detected ahead of you.

Instrument cluster with en- Displays in the Head-up Display hanced features: The information from Active Cruise Control Vehicle symbol is displayed: a can also be displayed in the Head-up Dis- vehicle has been detected play. ahead of you.

With the Stop&Go function for Step- System limits tronic transmissions: Detection range Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away. ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, activate ACC as follows: – By briefly pressing the accelerator pedal. – By pressing the RES CNCL button. – By pressing the or button.

Indicator/warning lights The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected. Icon flashes orange.

Instrument cluster with enhanced Deceleration features: The system does not decelerate in the fol- Vehicle symbol flashes. lowing situations: – For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly The conditions are not adequate for the sys- slow-moving road users. tem to work. – For red traffic lights. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by – For cross traffic. pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator – For oncoming traffic. pedal. – Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork- Icon flashes red and a signal sounds: ing lighting at night. Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary.

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 189

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Merging vehicles Cornering

A vehicle driving in front of you is not de- When the desired speed is too high for a tected until it is completely within the same curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Be- lane as your vehicle. cause curves may not be anticipated in ad- If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly vance, drive into a curve at an appropriate merges into your lane, the system may not speed. be able to automatically restore the selected The system has a limited detection range. distance. It may not be possible to restore Situations can arise in tight curves where a the selected distance in certain situations, vehicle driving ahead will not be detected including if you are driving significantly or will be detected very late. faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

With Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmission: driving off In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive When you approach a curve the system may off automatically; for example: briefly report vehicles in the next lane due – On steep uphill grades. to the bend of the curve. If the system de- – In front of bumps in the road. celerates you may compensate it by briefly In these cases, press on the accelerator accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal. pedal the system is reactivated and controls speed independently.

Weather The following restrictions can occur under unfavorable weather or light conditions: – Poorer vehicle recognition. – Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized.

189 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 190

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Examples of unfavorable weather or light Cruise control conditions: – Wet conditions. Concept – Snowfall. Using this system, a desired speed can be – Slush. adjusted using the buttons on the steering – Fog. wheel. The system maintains the desired – Glare. speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for instance by braking, steering or General information evading. The system is functional at speeds begin- ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. Engine power Depending on the settings, the cruise con- The desired speed may not be maintained trol settings may change under certain con- on uphill grades if engine power is insuffi- ditions. cient. Safety information Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed if the Warning system fails or was automatically deacti- The system cannot serve as a substitute vated. for the driver’s personal judgment in as- The system may be limited in the following sessing the traffic situation. Based on the situations: limits of the system, it cannot independ- – When an object was not correctly de- ently react to all traffic situations. There is tected. a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- and actively intervene where appropriate. fall. – In tight curves. – If the field of view of the camera or the Warning windshield is dirty or covered. The use of the system can lead to an in- – When driving toward bright lights. creased risk of accidents in the following – Up to 20 seconds after the start of the situations, for instance: engine, via the Start/Stop button. – On winding roads. – During calibration of the camera imme- – In heavy traffic. diately after vehicle delivery. – On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet conditions, or on a loose road surface. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 191

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Overview Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed. Buttons on the steering wheel DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. Button Function Cruise control on/off, refer to Switching off page 191. Press the button on the steering wheel. Pause cruise control, refer to page 191. The displays go out. The stored desired Continue cruise control with the speed is deleted. last setting, refer to page 192. Interrupting manually Increase speed, refer to page 191. When active, press the button on the steering wheel. Reduce speed, refer to page 191. Interrupting automatically Switching on/off and interrupting The system is automatically interrupted in cruise control the following situations: – When the driver applies the brakes. Switching on – If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few Press the button on the steering seconds or released while a gear is not wheel. engaged. – If the gear engaged is too high for the Instrument cluster without enhanced current speed. features: – If selector lever position N is set. The indicator light in the instrument – Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti- cluster lights up. vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. Instrument cluster without enhanced features: – If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter- venes. The current speed is adopted as the desired speed and is displayed with the symbol in the instrument cluster. Setting the speed

Instrument cluster with en- Maintaining/storing the speed hanced features: Press or button in the interrupted Display in the instrument state. cluster lights up. The current When the system is switched on, the cur- speed is adopted as the speed rent speed is maintained and stored as the limit. desired speed. The stored speed is displayed in the instrument cluster.

191 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 192

CONTROLS Driving comfort

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched Displays in the instrument cluster on, if necessary. Indicator light Changing the speed Instrument cluster without enhanced or button: press until the desired features: speed is set. Depending on how the vehicle is If active, the displayed speed is stored and equipped, the indicator light in the instru- the vehicle reaches the stored speed when ment cluster indicates whether the system the road is clear. is switched on. – or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired Instrument cluster with en- speed increases or decreases by approx. hanced features: 1 mph/1 km/h. The indicator in the instru- – or button: each time it is pressed ment cluster lights up: the sys- past the resistance point, the desired tem is switched on. speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ 10 km/h. Desired speed and stored speed – or button: press button to resistance point and hold. The vehicle acceler- Instrument cluster without enhanced ates or decelerates without pressure on features: the accelerator pedal. After the button is The desired speed is displayed to- released, the vehicle maintains its final gether with the symbol. speed. Pressing the switch beyond the – Display lights up green: system is active, resistance point causes the vehicle to the display indicates the desired speed. accelerate more rapidly. – Display lights up orange: system is interrupted, the display indicates the Continuing cruise control stored speed. General information – No display: system is switched off. An interrupted cruise control can be contin- Instrument cluster with en- ued by calling up the stored speed. hanced features: Make sure that the difference between cur- The desired speed is displayed rent speed and stored speed is not too large together with the symbol. before calling up the stored speed. Other- – Display lights up green: wise, unintentional braking or accelerating system is active, the dis- may occur. play indicates the desired speed. Calling up the stored speed – Display lights up gray: system is inter- Press the button on the steering rupted, the display indicates the stored wheel. speed. The stored speed is reached again and main- – No display: system is switched off. tained.

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 193

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Instrument cluster without enhanced fea- Safety information tures: If no speed is indicated, it is possible that Warning the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as- System limits sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle sur- Engine power roundings closely and actively intervene The desired speed is also maintained down- where appropriate. hill, but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient. Warning PDC Park Distance Control Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis- tance Control is activated, the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances. Concept There is a risk of injury or risk of damage PDC is a support when parking. The system to property. Avoid approaching an object detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve- too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in Park Distance Control is not yet active. front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob- jects that you are approaching slowly are indicated by signal tones and a visual display. Overview General information With front PDC: button in vehicle The ultrasound sensors for measuring the distances are located in the bumpers. The range, depending on obstacles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given in the following situations: – By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object. Park assistance button – By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object. – When a collision is imminent. Ultrasound sensors Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, for instance in the bumpers.

193 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 194

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Functional requirements – On: the LED lights up. Ensure full functionality: – Off: the LED goes out. – Do not cover sensors, for instance with The rearview camera image is displayed if stickers, bicycle racks or similar. the reverse gear is engaged when pressing – Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. the park assistance button. Depending on the equipment version, the Switching on/off system cannot be switched off manually if the reverse gear is engaged. Switching on automatically Warning The system switches on automatically in the following situations: Signal tones – If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running. An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an The rearview camera also switches on. object is detected to the left rear of the ve- – With front PDC: when obstacles are de- hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear tected behind or in front of the vehicle speaker. by PDC and the speed is slower than ap- The shorter the distance to the object, the prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. shorter the intervals. With front PDC: automatic activation on ob- When the distance to a detected object is stacle detection can be switched off. Via the less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a contin- Central Information Display (CID): uous tone is sounded. 1. "My MINI" With front PDC: when objects are simulta- 2. "Vehicle settings" neously located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig- 3. "Parking" nal is sounded. 4. "Automatic PDC Activation": depending The signal tone is switched off, when selec- on the vehicle equipment. tor lever position P is engaged on vehicles 5. "Automatic PDC Activation" with Steptronic transmission. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used. Volume The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to Automatic deactivation during the entertainment volume can be adjusted. forward travel 1. "My MINI" The system switches off when a certain 2. "System settings" driving distance or speed is exceeded. 3. "Tone" Switch the system back on, if needed. 4. "Volume settings" With front PDC: switching on/off 5. "PDC" manually 6. Set the desired value. Press the park assistance button. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 195

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Visual warning – If cargo protrudes. The approach of the vehicle to an object can – Under certain weather conditions such be shown on the Control Display. Objects as high relative humidity, wet condi- that are farther away are already displayed tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong on the Control Display before a signal wind. sounds. – With tow bars and trailer couplings of A display appears as soon as Park Distance other vehicles. Control (PDC) is activated. – With thin or wedge-shaped objects. The range of the sensors is represented in – With moving objects. colors: red, green and yellow. – With elevated, protruding objects such When the image of the rearview camera is as ledges or cargo. displayed, the switch can be made to PDC: – With objects with corners and sharp "Rear view camera" edges. – With objects with a fine surface struc- System limits ture such as fences. Safety information – For objects with porous surfaces. – Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind Warning area of the sensors before or after a con- The system is designed to operate in cer- tinuous tone sounds. tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system False warnings may not respond. There may be a risk of The system may issue a warning under the accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- following conditions even though there is tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the no obstacle within the detection range: information in this Owner’s Manual regarding the scope of the system’s opera- – In heavy rain. tion and limitations. – When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice. – When sensors are covered in snow. Limits of ultrasonic measurement – On rough road surfaces. The detection of objects with ultrasonic – On uneven surfaces, such as speed measurements can run into physical limits, bumps. for instance under the following conditions: – In large buildings with right angles and – For small children and animals. smooth walls, for instance in under- – For persons with certain clothing, for in- ground garages. stance coats. – In automatic car washes. – With external interference of the ultra- – Due to heavy exhaust. sound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines. – Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance sweeping machines, high pres- – When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam- sure steam cleaners or neon lights. aged or out of position.

195 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 196

CONTROLS Driving comfort

The malfunction is signaled by a contin- Overview uous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the mal- Depending on the vehicle equipment: function due to other ultrasound sources button in the vehicle is no longer present, the system is again fully functional. With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detection, for instance in car washes; see Switching on/off. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed in the instrument cluster. Park assistance button Red icon is displayed, and the range of the sensors is dimmed on the Con- trol Display. Camera PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

Concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The The camera lens is located between the li- area behind the vehicle is shown on the cense plate lights. Control Display. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Safety information If necessary, clean the camera lens. Switching on/off Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute Switching on automatically for the driver’s personal judgment in as- The system is switched on automatically if sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk selector lever position R is engaged when of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic the engine is running. conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively intervene Automatic deactivation during where appropriate. forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 197

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Switch the system back on, if needed. Obstacles are marked, depending on the vehicle equipment. Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually Lanes Press the park assistance button.

– On: the LED lights up. – Off: the LED goes out. The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display.

Switching the view via the Central Information Display (CID) Lanes can be superimposed on the image of If the rearview camera view is not dis- the rearview camera. played, change the view via the Central In- Lanes help you to estimate the space re- formation Display (CID): quired when parking and maneuvering on "Rear view camera" level roads. The rearview camera image is displayed. Lanes depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steer- Display on the Control Display ing wheel movements.

Functional requirements Turning radius lines – The rearview camera is switched on. – Split doors are completely closed. – Keep the recording range of the camera open. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and trailers that are not connected to a trailer power socket can lead to malfunctions.

Activating assistance functions Turning radius lines can be superimposed More than one assistance function can be on the image of the rearview camera. active at the same time. Turning radius lines show the course of the – Parking aid lines smallest possible turning radius on a level "Parking aid lines" road. Lanes and turning radius lines are indi- Only one turning radius line is displayed af- cated. ter the steering wheel is turned past a certain angle. – Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking"

197 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 198

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Obstacle marking 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the lane covers the corresponding turning radius line.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera. The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark- Display settings ings match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Control. Brightness With the rearview camera switched on: Parking using lanes and turning 1. Select the icon. radius lines 2. Turn the Controller until the desired set- 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ting is reached and press the Controller. radius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space. Contrast With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Select the icon. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is reached and press the Controller. System limits

Detection of objects Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be recognized by the system. Depending on the vehicle equipment, some assistance functions also consider data from the PDC Park Distance Control. Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Control chapter. The objects displayed on the Control Dis- play may be closer than they appear. There-

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 199

Driving comfort CONTROLS

fore, do not estimate the distance from the Safety information objects on the display. The bumper of the vehicle is not visible in Warning the camera picture. Therefore do not drive closer toward an obstacle than shown by The system cannot serve as a substitute the marks in the camera picture. This also for the driver’s personal judgment in as- applies, when the camera picture still shows sessing the traffic situation. Based on the a gap between the vehicle and the obstacle. limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely Parking assistant and actively intervene where appropriate. Concept NOTICE The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Dis- tance Control applies in addition. This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road. Overview General information Button in the vehicle Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps: – Switching on and activating. – Parking space search. – Parking. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of Park assistance button steering during the parking operation. System status and instructions on required actions are displayed on the Control Dis- play. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control.

199 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 200

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Ultrasound sensors – The parking brake is released. – When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be switched on. Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button Press the park assistance button. The LED lights up. The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the wheel hous- The current status of the parking space ing. search is indicated on the Control Display. Parking assistant is activated automati- Functional requirements cally.

Ultrasound sensors Switching on with reverse gear Ensure full functionality: Shift into reverse. – Do not cover sensors, for instance with The current status of the parking space stickers. search is indicated on the Control Display. – Keep the sensors clean and unob- To activate: "Parking Assistant" structed. Display on the Control Display For measuring parking spaces System activated/deactivated – Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. Icon Meaning – Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: 5 ft/1.5 m. Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but Suitable parking space not activated. – Gaps behind an object that has a min. The system is activated. length of 5 ft/1.5 m. – Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. – Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m. – Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For the parking operation – Doors and split doors are closed.

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 201

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Parking space search and system and at a distance of maximum status 5 ft/1.5 m. The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the Control Display, refer to page 200. 3. Follow the instructions on the Control Display. The parking assistant takes control of steering during the parking operation. The driver takes over braking and accel- – Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park- erating. ing assistant is activated and the park- The best possible parking position will ing space search is active. come after gear change on the station- – Control Display shows suitable parking ary vehicle - wait for the automatic spaces at the edge of the road next to steering wheel move. the vehicle symbol. When the parking The end of the parking operation is indi- assistant is active, suitable parking cated on the Control Display. spaces are highlighted. 4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if – The parking operation is needed. active. The system takes over the steering. Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time: – Parking space search is always active – Press the park assistance button. whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deacti- – "Parking Assistant" vated, the displays on the Control Dis- play are shown in gray. Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in Parking using the parking assistant the following situations: – If the driver grasps the steering wheel Parking or takes over steering. – If a gear is selected that does not match 1. Press the park assistance button or the instruction on the Control Display. shift into reverse gear to switch on the parking assistant, refer to page 200. Ac- – If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. tivate the parking assistant, if needed. 6 mph/10 km/h. Parking assistant is activated. – Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces. 2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h

201 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 202

CONTROLS Driving comfort

– If a maximum number of parking at- Functional limitations tempts or the time taken for parking is The system may be limited in the following exceeded. situations: – If the PDC Park Distance Control dis- – On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel plays clearances that are too small. roads. – When switching into other functions of – On slippery ground. the radio. – With accumulations of leaves/snow in A Check Control message is displayed. the parking space. Resuming – With a mounted emergency wheel. An interrupted parking operation can be – With ditches or edges, for instance an continued, if needed. edge of a port. Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to Limits of ultrasonic measurement page 200, and follow the instructions on the Control Display. The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, Switching off for instance under the following conditions: – For small children and animals. The system can be switched off as follows: – For persons with certain clothing, for in- – Press the park assistance button. stance coats. – With external interference of the ultra- – Switching off the ignition. sound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines. System limits – When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position. Safety information – If cargo protrudes. – Under certain weather conditions such Warning as high relative humidity, wet condi- The system is designed to operate in cer- tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong tain conditions and circumstances. Due to wind. conditions or other factors, the system – With tow bars and trailer couplings of may not respond. There may be a risk of other vehicles. accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the – With thin or wedge-shaped objects. information in this Owner’s Manual re- – With moving objects. garding the scope of the system’s opera- – With elevated, protruding objects such tion and limitations. as ledges or cargo. – With objects with corners and sharp No parking assistance edges. The parking assistant does not offer assis- – With objects with a fine surface struc- tance in the following situations: ture such as fences. – In tight curves. – For objects with porous surfaces.

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 203

Driving comfort CONTROLS

– Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. – The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Tire size The parking position may vary depending on the tire size. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

203 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 204

CONTROLS Climate control

Climate control

Vehicle features and options – Emission tested passenger compartment. This chapter describes all standard, country- – Microfilter. specific and optional features offered with – Air conditioning system to control the the series. It also describes features and temperature, air flow and recirculated- functions that are not necessarily available air mode. in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Depending on the equipment specification: tions or country versions. This also applies – Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter. to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, – Automatic climate control. the applicable laws and regulations must be – Parked-car ventilation. observed.

Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the following components:

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 205

Climate control CONTROLS

Air conditioner

1 Air distribution settings 6 Air recirculation mode 2 Air flow 7 Rear window defroster 3 Temperature 8 Windshield defroster 4 Seat heating, right 87 9 Seat heating, left 87 5 Air conditioning

Climate control functions in detail Temperature

Switching the system on/off Concept The system heats or cools, depending on the Switching on set temperature. Set any air flow. Adjusting Switching off Turn the wheel to set the de- Turn the wheel for air flow all sired temperature. the way to the left.

205 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 206

CONTROLS Climate control

Air conditioning ter a certain amount of time, depending on the outside temperature. Concept With extended air recirculation mode, the The air in the car's interior will be cooled air quality in the interior deteriorates and and dehumidified and, depending on the window fogging increases. temperature setting, warmed again. If the windows fog over, switch off air recirculation mode and increase the air flow, if Functional requirement needed. The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running. Air flow, manual

Switching on/off Concept Press the button. The air flow for climate control can be ad- The LED is illuminated with air con- justed manually. ditioning switched on. Adjusting Depending on the weather, the windshield Turn the ring to set the de- may fog up briefly when the engine is sired air flow. started. The higher the air flow, the The cooling mode produces condensation, more effective the heating or refer to page 237, that will exit from below cooling will be. the vehicle. The air flow from the air conditioner may be Air recirculation mode reduced automatically to save battery power. Concept You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu- Manual air distribution tants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside Concept air. The system then recirculates the air The air distribution for climate control can flow within the vehicle. be adjusted manually.

Operation Adjusting Press the button: Turn the wheel to select the The LED is illuminated when recir- desired program or the desired culated-air mode is switched on. The supply intermediate setting. of outside air is shut off. When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte- – Windows. rior. – Upper body region. To prevent window condensation, recircu- – Floor area. lated-air mode switches off automatically af- – Windows, upper body region, and floor area.

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 207

Climate control CONTROLS

To defrost windows and remove Rear window defroster condensation Press the button. The LED lights up. Make the following settings to defrost the The rear window defroster switches windows and remove condensation: off automatically after a certain period of – Direct the air distribution onto the win- time. dows. – Increasing the air flow. When GREEN drive mode is activated, the heating output is reduced. – Increase the temperature. – Switch on air conditioning if needed. Microfilter In external and recirculated-air mode, the Windshield defroster microfilter filters dust and pollen from the Press the button. The LED lights up. air. The front window defroster Have this filter changed during vehicle switches off automatically after a certain maintenance, refer to page 279. period of time.

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left 5 Air distribution, manual 2 Display 6 Display 3 Air flow, AUTO intensity 7 Temperature, right 4 AUTO program 8 Seat heating, right 87

207 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 208

CONTROLS Climate control

9 Maximum cooling 13 Windshield defroster 10 Air conditioning 14 To defrost windows and remove conden- 11 Air recirculation mode sation 12 Rear window defroster 15 Seat heating, left 87

Climate control functions in detail Air conditioning

Switching the system on/off Concept The air in the car's interior will be cooled Switching on and dehumidified and, depending on the Set any air flow. temperature setting, warmed again.

Switching off Functional requirement Turn wheel for air flow to the The car's interior can only be cooled with left until the control switches the engine running. off. Switching on/off Press the button. The LED is illuminated with air con- Temperature ditioning switched on.

Concept Depending on the weather, the windshield The automatic climate control achieves the may fog up briefly when the engine is set temperature as quickly as possible, if started. necessary by using the maximum cooling or Air conditioning is switched on automati- heating power, and then keeps it constant. cally with the AUTO program. The cooling mode produces condensation, Adjusting refer to page 237, that will exit from below Turn the wheel to set the de- the vehicle. sired temperature. Maximum cooling

Concept Do not rapidly switch between different The system is set to the lowest temperature, temperature settings. The automatic climate maximum air flow and recirculated-air control will not have sufficient time to ad- mode. just the set temperature. Functional requirement The function is available at outside temperatures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the engine running.

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 209

Climate control CONTROLS

Switching on/off Turn the wheel to set the de- Press the button. sired intensity from soft to intensive. The LED is illuminated with the system switched on. Air flows out of the vents to the upper body The set intensity is displayed via the posi- region. The vents need to be open for this. tion of the illuminated LED segment. The air flow can be adjusted when maximum cooling is switched on. Automatic recirculated-air control (AUC)/recirculated-air mode AUTO program Concept Concept The automatic recirculated-air control The AUTO program cools, ventilates or (AUC) recognizes pollutants in the outside heats the car's interior automatically. air. The outside air supply is shut off and the interior air is recirculated. For this, the air flow, air distribution and temperature are regulated depending on the General information settings and the interior temperature. If the system is activated, a sensor detects Switching on/off pollutants in the outside air and controls the shut-off automatically. Press the button. If the system is deactivated, outside air con- The LED is illuminated with the tinuously flows into the car's interior. AUTO program switched on. With constant air recirculation mode, the Depending on the selected temperature, air quality in the car's interior deteriorates AUTO intensity and outside influences, the and window fogging increases. air is directed to the windshield, side win- You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu- dows, upper body, and into the floor area. tants in the immediate environment by tem- Point the side vents toward the side win- porarily suspending the supply of outside dows. air. The system then recirculates the air The following features are switched on au- flow within the vehicle. tomatically with the AUTO program: Turning on/off – Air conditioning, refer to page 208. Press button repeatedly to select an To switch off the program: press the button operating mode: again or manually adjust the air distribution. – LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. Controlling the intensity of the air flow – Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air With the AUTO program switched on, the control: a sensor detects pollutants in intensity can be adjusted. This changes the the outside air and shuts off automati- automatic control for the air mass. cally.

209 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 210

CONTROLS Climate control

– Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the – Windows, upper body region, and floor supply of outside air into the vehicle is area. permanently disabled. – Upper body region and floor area. To prevent window condensation, recircu- – Floor area. lated-air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on – Windows and floor area. the outside temperature. – Windows. If windows are fogged over, switch off the – Windows and upper body region. recirculating mode and press the AUTO but- – Upper body region. ton. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield. To defrost windows and remove condensation Air flow, manual Concept Concept Ice and condensation are quickly removed The air flow for climate control can be ad- from the windshield and the front side win- justed manually. dows.

General information Switching on/off To adjust the air flow manually switch off Press the button. AUTO program first. The LED is illuminated with the Adjusting system switched on. Turn the ring to set the de- The air flow can be adjusted with the pro- sired air flow. gram active. If there is window condensation, switch on the climate control function as well.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayed Windshield defroster via illuminated LED segments. Press the button. The LED lights up. The air flow of the automatic climate con- The front window defroster trol may be reduced automatically to save switches off automatically after a certain battery power. period of time. Manual air distribution Rear window defroster Concept Press the button. The LED lights up. The air distribution for climate control can The rear window defroster switches be adjusted manually. off automatically after a certain period of time. Adjusting When GREEN drive mode is activated, the Press the button repeatedly to se- heating output is reduced. lect a program:

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 211

Climate control CONTROLS

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter Ventilation in the rear In external and recirculated-air mode, the microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 279.

Ventilation – Lever for changing the air flow direc- Setting tion, arrow 1. The air flow directions can be individually – Thumbwheel for variable opening and adjusted: closing of the vents, arrow 2. – Direct ventilation: The air flow is directly pointed onto the person. The air flow heats or cools no- Parked-car ventilation ticeably, depending on the adjusted temperature. Concept – Indirect ventilation: The parked-car ventilation ventilates the If the vents are fully or partly closed, the car's interior and lowers its temperature, if air is directly routed into the car's inte- needed. rior. General information Front ventilation The parked-car ventilation can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset activation times. The system remains switched on for 30 minutes. The parked-car ventilation system is operated via the Central Information Display (CID). Functional requirements – Direct operation: vehicle is in radio- – Turn knob for continuous opening and ready state. closing of the vents. – Direct operation or preset activation – Swivel the vents to alter the direction of time: does not depend on outside tem- the vent flow, arrows. perature. – Battery is sufficiently charged. If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged.

211 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 212

CONTROLS Climate control

Thus, limit the maximum activation time The icon on the automatic climate con- to save the vehicle battery. The system trol flashes when the system has been will be available again after the engine switched on. is started or after a short trip. The system will only be switched on within – Make sure that the vehicle's date and the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be time are set correctly. reactivated. – Open the vents to allow air to flow out. Switching on/off directly Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "Activate comfort ventilation now" The icon on the automatic climate control flashes if the system is switched on. Preselecting the activation time Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "Comfort ventilation" 5. Select the desired activation time. 6. Set the desired time.

Activating the activation time Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "For start time at:" Activate the desired activation time. The icon on the automatic climate control lights up when the activation time is activated.

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 213

Interior equipment CONTROLS

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options Safety information

This chapter describes all standard, country- Warning specific and optional features offered with The operation of remote-controlled sys- the series. It also describes features and tems with the integrated universal remote functions that are not necessarily available control, such as the garage door, may re- in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- sult in injury, for example, body parts be- tions or country versions. This also applies coming jammed in a garage door. There is to safety-related functions and systems. a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop- When using these functions and systems, erty. Make sure that the area of movement the applicable laws and regulations must be of the respective system is clear during observed. programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter. Integrated Universal Remote Control Compatibility Concept If this symbol is printed on the pack- aging or in the owner's manual of the The integrated Universal Remote Control in system to be controlled, the system the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func- is generally compatible with the integrated tions of remote-controlled systems such as Universal Remote Control. garage door drives, barriers, or lighting systems. Additional questions are answered by: – A dealer's service center or another General information qualified service center or repair shop. The Integrated Universal Remote Control – www.homelink.com on the Internet. replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans- HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen- mitters. To operate the remote control, the tex Corporation. buttons on the interior mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control. Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security. If possible, do not install the antenna of the remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door drive, near metal objects to ensure the best possible operation.

213 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 214

CONTROLS Interior equipment

Overview down the interior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds. 6. – The LED lights up green: programming completed. Release the button. – The LED flashes fast: programming is not complete. Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release. Per- 1 LED form this procedure three times to 2 Programmable keys complete the programming procedure. 3 Hand-held transmitters of the system If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, con- Programming tinue with the special features for change code wireless systems. General information – LED does not flash green after The battery of the hand-held transmitter 60 seconds: programming not com- must be fully charged at the time of pro- pleted. gramming to ensure an optimal range of the Repeat steps 3 to 6. integrated universal remote control. To program other functions on other but- 1. Switch on the ignition. tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 2. Initial setup: Special feature of the rolling code Press and hold the two outer buttons on wireless system the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED If you are unable to operate the system af- flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro- ter repeated programming, please check if gramming of the buttons on the interior the system to be controlled features a roll- mirror. ing code radio system. 3. Press the interior mirror button to be Refer to the owner's manual for the system. programmed. The LED on the interior For systems with a rolling code radio sys- mirror will slowly begin flashing orange. tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con- 4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the trol and the system also have to be system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 synchronized. to 30 cm away from the buttons on the Please read the owner's manual to find out interior mirror. The required distance how to synchronize the system. depends on the hand-held transmitter. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a 5. Press and hold the button of the desired second person. function on the hand-held transmitter. Synchronizing the universal remote control Canada: if programming with the hand- with the system: held transmitter was interrupted, hold

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 215

Interior equipment CONTROLS

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re- Press the button on the interior mir- mote-controlled system. ror for 2 seconds and release. Per- form this procedure three times to 2. Program the relevant button on the inte- complete the programming proce- rior mirror as described. dure. 3. Locate and press the synchronizing but- If the integrated universal remote ton on the system being programmed, control remains nonoperational, con- e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. tinue with the special features for 30 seconds for the next step. change code wireless systems. 4. Hold down the programmed button on – LED does not flash green after the interior mirror for approximately 60 seconds: programming not com- 3 seconds and then release it. If neces- pleted. sary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once Repeat steps 3 to 6. synchronization is complete, the pro- If the programming procedure is not com- grammed function will be carried out. pleted, the previous programming will remain unchanged. Reprogramming individual buttons Operation 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be programmed. Warning 3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir- The operation of remote-controlled sys- ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec- tems with the integrated universal remote onds, release the button. control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts be- 4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the coming jammed in a garage door. There is system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop- to 30 cm away from the buttons on the erty. Make sure that the area of movement interior mirror. The required distance of the respective system is clear during depends on the hand-held transmitter. programming and operation. Also follow 5. Press and hold the button of the desired the safety information of the hand-held function on the hand-held transmitter. transmitter. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold The system, such as the garage door, can be down the interior mirror button and re- operated using the button on the interior peatedly press and release the hand-held mirror while the engine is running or when transmitter button for 2 seconds. the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the 6. The LED can light up in different ways. system until the function is activated. The – The LED lights up green: the pro- interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire- gramming procedure is completed. less signal is being transmitted. Release the button. – The LED flashes fast: the hand-held Deleting stored functions transmitter was detected but pro- All stored functions will be deleted. The gramming is not complete. functions cannot be deleted individually.

215 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 216

CONTROLS Interior equipment

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the Operating concept interior mirror simultaneously for approxi- Various functions can be called up by press- mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in- ing the control button with a pointed object, terior mirror flashes green rapidly. such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how Digital compass long the control button is pressed: – Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. Overview – 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. – 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. – 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting. – 12 to 15 seconds: language setting. Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the vehicle so that the compass operates correctly; 1 Control button refer to World map with compass zones. 2 Mirror display

Mirror display The compass shows the current driving direction.

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 217

Interior equipment CONTROLS

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap- 1. Make sure that there are no large metal- prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the lic objects or overhead power lines near set compass zone appears in the mirror. the vehicle and that there is sufficient 2. To change the zone setting, press the room to drive around in a circle. control button quickly and repeatedly 2. Set the currently applicable compass until the number of the compass zone zone. that corresponds with your location ap- 3. Press and hold the control button for appears in the mirror. prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears The set zone is stored automatically. The on the display. Next, drive in a complete compass is ready for use again after approx- circle at least once at a speed of no more imately 10 seconds. than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the "C" is replaced by the points Calibrating the digital compass of the compass. The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following: Left/right-hand steering – The wrong compass point is displayed. The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory. – The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direction of travel. Setting the language – Not all points of the compass are dis- Press and hold the control button for ap- played. prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the

217 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 218

CONTROLS Interior equipment

control button again to switch between Cigarette lighter English "E" and German "O". Settings are stored automatically after ap- Safety information proximately 10 seconds. Warning Sun visor Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ig- Glare shield nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is To provide protection against glare, fold the held against the objects. There is a risk of sun visor down or pivot it to the side. fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential dam- Vanity mirror age. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that children do not A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor use the cigarette lighter. behind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on. NOTICE If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of Ashtray/cigarette lighter damage to property, among other potential damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or Overview socket cover again after using the socket.

Operation Push in the cigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in Sockets the center console. Concept Ashtray The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the ignition In order to empty the ashtray, remove the is switched on or the engine is running. ashtray from the cup holder. General information The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 219

Interior equipment CONTROLS

Do not damage the socket by using non- In the center console compatible connectors. Safety information

Warning Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior during unfolding. There is a risk of Remove the cover or cigarette lighter. injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding. In the cargo area

NOTICE Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt electrical system can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the en- The socket is located on the right side in gine compartment. the cargo area.

NOTICE USB port If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential General information damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or Follow the information regarding the con- socket cover again after using the socket. nection of mobile devices to the USB port in the section on USB connections, refer to page 55.

219 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 220

CONTROLS Interior equipment

In the front center console Under the center armrest

The USB port is located in the front of the The USB port is located under the center center console. armrest. Properties: Properties: – USB port Type A. – USB port Type C. – For charging mobile devices and for – For charging mobile devices and for data transfer. data transfer. – Charge current: max. 1.5 A. – Charge current: max. 3 A. In the rear center console Wireless charging tray

Concept The wireless charging tray enables the following functions to be performed without cables: – Charging the rechargeable battery of a mobile phone with Qi capability and of other mobile devices, which support the One USB dual charge socket is located in Qi standard. the rear center console. – Connect the mobile phone to the exter- Properties: nal antenna. – USB port Type C. Depending on the country, this provides for better network reception and a con- – For charging of mobile devices. sistent reproduction quality. – Charge current: max. 3 A. General information When inserting the mobile phone, make sure there are no objects between it and the wireless charging tray. During charging, the surface of the tray and the mobile phone may become warm.

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 221

Interior equipment CONTROLS

Higher temperatures may lead to a reduction in the charge current through the mo- NOTICE bile phone, and in isolated cases the charg- The tray is intended for mobile phones up ing process is paused temporarily. Follow to a particular size. Forceful inserting of the relevant instructions in the mobile the mobile phone into the tray can damage phone owner's manual. the tray or the mobile phone. There is a risk of damage to property, among other NOTE potential damage. Observe the maximum This device has been tested for human ex- dimensions for mobile phones. Do not posure limits and found compliant at a mini- force the mobile phone into the tray. mum distance of 4 in/10 cm during operation. Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be Functional requirements maintained in every direction when operat- – Ignition or standby state is switched on. ing the device. – The mobile phone must compatibly support the required Qi standard. Compati- ble mobile phones, refer to page 53. If the mobile phone does not support the Qi standard, the mobile phone can be charged using a special Qi-compatible charging case. – Use only protective jackets and covers up to a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm. Otherwise, the charging Mounting position of the product. function may be impaired. – The mobile phone must not exceed the maximum size of approximately 5.9 x Safety information 3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm.

Warning Overview When charging a device that meets the Qi The wireless charging tray is located in the standard in the wireless charging tray, any center armrest. metal objects located between the device and the tray can become very hot. Placing storage devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal transmission, between the device and the tray may impair the card function. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. When charging mobile devices, make sure there are no objects between the device and the tray.

221 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 222

CONTROLS Interior equipment

LED displays

Color Meaning Blue The mobile phone is charging. Depending on the model, the blue LED is no longer illuminated once the inserted mobile phone with Qi capability is fully charged. 1 Front holder with LED 2 Storage area Or- The mobile phone is not charg- ange ing. 3 Movable clamp Temperature on the mobile phone possibly too high or for- Inserting the mobile phone eign object in the charging tray. 1. Open the center armrest. Red The mobile phone is not charg- 2. Push back the clamp. ing. 3. Insert the mobile phone with the display Contact a dealer’s service center facing upward in the direction of the or another qualified service cen- front holder, arrow 1. ter or repair shop.

System limits At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile phone may be limited and some functions may no longer work. LTE-Compensator - Information and User Manual 4. Place the mobile phone in the storage Your car is equipped with a wireless charg- area, arrow 2. ing tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone 5. Push the clamp forward and clamp the and connect it to the mobile network. To en- mobile phone in the tray. sure the best possible connection a signal 6. Close the center armrest. booster (LTE-Compensator) is used in conjunction with the WCA. The following para- Removing the mobile phone graphs refer to this booster: This is a CONSUMER device. 1. Open the center armrest. BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS 2. Push the clamp back and remove the DEVICE with your wireless provider and mobile phone. have your provider's consent. Most wireless providers consent to the use of Compensa- tors. Some providers may not consent to the use of this device on their network. If you

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 223

Interior equipment CONTROLS

are unsure, contact your provider. You tennas or coupling devices will cause the MUST operate this device with approved an- cease of the booster´s operating license. tennas and cables as specified by the manu- The booster device fulfills the network pro- facturer. Antennas MUST be installed at tection standards as required by the FCC, least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You such as intermodulation limits, oscillation MUST cease operating this device immedi- detection and gain limits. ately if requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless service provider. Warning E911 lo- Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive cation information may not be provided or Model Number: LTECOMPB0 may be inaccurate for calls served by using Part Number: 6803145-01 this device. FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0 Please observe additionally the following information – Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to register their signal boosters by calling their toll-free number. – T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mobile.com/BoosterRegistra- tion); (https://saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/ SignalBooster#). – Verizon’s online registration link: (http://www.verizonwireless.com/ wcms/consumer/register-signal-booster.html). – AT&T online registration link (https:// securec45.securewebsession.com/ attsignalbooster.com/). – U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://www.uscellular.com/uscellular/ support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp). Before use you must register your booster device with your wireless provider. If you should be requested by the FCC to cease operating your booster, you are not allowed to insert your mobile phone in the charging tray anymore unless the booster is permanently deactivated by your local MINI dealer. You must not remove the booster from the car nor use it with any other than the prein- stalled coupling device or antenna. Any modification of the existing antenna or coupling device as well as the use of other an-

223 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 224

CONTROLS Storage compartments

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options – Glove compartment on the front passenger side. This chapter describes all standard, country- – Compartments in the doors. specific and optional features offered with – Storage compartment in the center arm- the series. It also describes features and rest. functions that are not necessarily available – Storage compartment in front of the cup in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- holders. tions or country versions. This also applies – Clothes hooks to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, – Storage compartments in the cargo area. the applicable laws and regulations must be – Storage tray in the center console. observed. – Pockets on the backrests of the front seats. Safety information Glove compartment

Warning Safety information Loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's in- Warning terior while driving, for instance in the Folded open, the glove compartment pro- event of an accident, braking or evasive trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure glove compartment can be thrown into the loose objects or devices with a cable con- car's interior while driving, for instance in nection to the vehicle in the car's interior. the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compartment im- NOTICE mediately after using it. Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Overview

The following storage compartments are available in the car's interior:

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 225

Storage compartments CONTROLS

Opening Center armrest

General information Two storage compartments are located in the center armrest. Opening

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing Fold up the cover. Upper storage compartment: press button, arrow 1, and fold the center armrest up, ar- Compartments in the doors row 2.

General information There are storage compartments in the doors. Safety information

Warning Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or Lower storage compartment: press button, glasses, can break in the event of an acci- arrow 1, and fold the center armrest up, ar- dent or a braking or evasive maneuver. row 2. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any breakable objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage compartments.

225 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 226

CONTROLS Storage compartments

Cup holders

Safety information

Warning Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. braking. Spilled liquids can distract from To open: press the button. the traffic conditions and lead to an acci- To close: push both covers back in, one after dent. Hot drinks can damage the cup the other. holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use Safety information lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot bever- NOTICE ages. With an open cup holder, the center armrest cannot be folded back up. There is a Front risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Press back the covers before the center armrest is folded up.

Clothes hooks

General information The clothes hooks are located above the rear doors. In the center console. Safety information Rear

General information Warning Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can The cup holder is located in the center arm- obstruct the view while driving. There is a rest. risk of accident. When suspending clothing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view.

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 227

Storage compartments CONTROLS

Warning Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks.

227 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 228

CONTROLS Cargo area

Cargo area

Vehicle features and options loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and Warning functions that are not necessarily available Improperly stowed objects can shift and in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- be thrown into the car's interior, for in- tions or country versions. This also applies stance in the event of an accident or dur- to safety-related functions and systems. ing braking and evasive maneuver. Vehi- When using these functions and systems, cle occupants can be hit and injured. There the applicable laws and regulations must be is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects observed. and cargo properly.

Loading NOTICE Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. Safety information There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area. Warning High gross weight can overheat the tires, damage them internally and cause a sud- NOTICE den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics may be negatively im- The cargo floor panel is designed for a par- pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen- ticular maximum weight. Weight that is ing the braking distances and changing too high and that is selective can damage the steering response. There is a risk of the cargo floor panel. There is a risk of accident. Pay attention to the permitted damage to property, among other potential load capacity of the tires and never exceed damage. Do not exceed the maximum load the permitted gross weight. of the cargo area floor and evenly distribute the cargo across the cargo area floor. The maximum load is 881 lbs / 440 kg. Warning Loose objects or devices with a cable con- Steps for Determining Correct Load nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile Limit phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the 1. Locate the statement “The combined event of an accident, braking or evasive weight of occupants and cargo should maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 229

Cargo area CONTROLS

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on Stowing and securing cargo your vehicle’s placard. – Cover sharp edges and corners on the 2. Determine the combined weight of the cargo. driver and passengers that will be riding – Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos- in your vehicle. sible, directly behind and at the bottom 3. Subtract the combined weight of the of the rear passenger seat backrests. driver and passengers from XXX kg or – Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is XXX lbs not occupied, secure each of the outer 4. The resulting figure equals the available safety belts in the opposite buckle. amount of cargo and luggage load ca- – If necessary, fold down the rear back- pacity. For example, if the “XXX” rests to stow large cargo. amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi- – Do not stack cargo above the top edge of cle, the amount of available cargo and the backrests. luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) 5. Determine the combined weight of lug- With storage compartment gage and cargo being loaded on the ve- package: lashing eyes in the hicle. That weight may not safely exceed cargo area the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Load With storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area. Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

229 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 230

CONTROLS Cargo area

Cargo cover Opening

Safety information Warning A cargo cover that snaps back quickly can Warning jam body parts or cause damage. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop- Loose objects or devices with a cable con- erty. Do not let the cargo cover snap back nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile into place. phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the Pull over the cargo cover and hook into the event of an accident, braking or evasive brackets on both sides. maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior. Removing For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can be removed. Closing

Warning An incorrectly inserted cargo cover can be thrown about the car's interior, such as in the event of an accident or a braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Make sure the cargo cover is securely engaged in the brackets. Press the release button, arrow 1, and pull the cargo cover out towards the rear, arrow 2.

Installing Slide the cargo cover in until it engages on both sides with an audible click.

Storage compartments in the Pull out the cargo cover, arrow 1, and hook cargo area both sides into the brackets, arrow 2. Side storage compartments Storage compartments are located on the left and right sides.

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 231

Cargo area CONTROLS

Storage compartments in the split General information doors The rear seat backrest is divided into two There are storage compartments in the split parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat doors. backrest is connected to the center section. With through-loading system: the rear seat Multifunction hook backrest is divided into three parts at a 40-20-40 ratio. The side rear seat backrests and the center section can be folded down Warning separately. Improper use of the multifunction hooks The rear seat backrests can be folded down can lead to a risk of objects flying about from the rear. during braking and evasive maneuvers, for example. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang Safety information lightweight objects, such as shopping bags, from the multifunction hooks. Only Warning transport heavy luggage in the cargo area Danger of jamming with folding down the if it has been appropriately secured. backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down.

Warning If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior; for instance, in the event of an ac- A multifunction hook is located on the right cident, braking or an evasive maneuver. side in the cargo area. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back. Enlarging the cargo area Warning Concept With a rear backrest that is not locked, the The cargo area can be enlarged as follows: protective function of the middle safety – The rear seat backrests can be folded belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of down. injuries or danger to life. If you are using – The rear seat backrests can be moved the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear into an upright loading position using seat backrest. the cargo setting.

231 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 232

CONTROLS Cargo area

Cargo position Warning The stability of the child restraint system Concept is limited or compromised with incorrect The rear seat backrests can be moved into seat setting or improper installation of the an upright loading position. child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child re- Adjusting straint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest 1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward. tilt for all affected backrests and correctly 2. Fold the frame up until it engages. adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is 3. Fold back and engage the rear seat clear when moving the head restraint. backrest.

Folding down the rear seat Folding down the center section backrest from the rear 1. Fold in the middle head restraint. 1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded 2. Press the switch and pull the center sec- down, fold in the center head restraint if tion forward. necessary. 2. Press the switch and pull the rear seat backrest forward.

Folding back the backrest Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not caught behind the backrest or in between the backrest and the rear seats.

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 233

Cargo area CONTROLS

Variable cargo area floor Folded up position

Concept Safety information With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo area can be configured corresponding to Warning transport requirements. Improper use of the variable cargo floor panel can lead to a danger of objects flying General information about during braking and evasive maneu- Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer vers. There is a risk of injury and risk of to page 228. damage to property. – Do not use the variable cargo floor Removing the cargo floor panel panel to separate the cargo area and vehicle interior in the sense of a par- 1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor tition net. panel upward. – Only use the variable cargo floor panel in the folded-up position when the backrests are folded up and locked. – Fold down the variable cargo floor panel before driving off. – Always secure cargo against shifting, using straps, belts and lashing eyes, for instance.

2. Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold slightly upward. Fold up the cargo floor panel Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel upward.

3. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from the brackets. Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall the Fold up the cargo floor panel and press be- cargo area floor. hind the locks on the left and right, arrow. You've reached the maximum cargo height.

233 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 234

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options Engine, transmission, and axle drive This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km the series. It also describes features and Do not exceed the maximum engine and functions that are not necessarily available road speed: in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- – For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and tions or country versions. This also applies 100 mph/160 km/h. to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir- the applicable laws and regulations must be cumstances. observed. From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually Breaking-in period be increased.

General information Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac- Moving parts need to begin working to- turing circumstances when tires are brand- gether smoothly. new; they achieve their full traction poten- The following instructions will help you to tial after a break-in time. achieve a long vehicle life and good effi- Drive conservatively for the first ciency. 200 miles/300 km. During break-in, do not use the Launch Control, refer to page 124. Brake system Safety information Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately Warning during this break-in period. Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react Clutch with a delay. There is a risk of accident. The function of the clutch reaches its opti- After installing new parts or with a new mal level only after a distance driven of ap- vehicle, drive conservatively and inter- prox. 300 miles/500 km. During this break- vene early if necessary. Observe the break- in period, engage the clutch gently. in procedures of the respective parts and components. Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned

234 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 235

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life. Warning If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of General driving notes the exhaust gas system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire and inju- Closing split doors ries. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Safety information Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or during park- Warning ing. An open split door protrudes from the vehicle and can endanger occupants and other road users or damage the vehicle in Mobile communication devices in the event of an accident, braking or eva- the vehicle sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. Warning There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not drive with split doors Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can open. influence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mobile phones. There is a risk of injury or Driving with the split doors open risk of damage to property. If possible, in If nevertheless you need to drive with split the car's interior use only mobile phones doors open: with direct connections to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual interfer- – Close all windows and the glass sunroof. ence and deflect the radiation from the – Greatly increase the air flow from the car's interior. vents. – Drive moderately. Hydroplaning Hot exhaust gas system On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. Warning This phenomenon is referred to as hydro- High temperatures can occur underneath planing. It is characterized by a partial or the body, for instance caused by the ex- complete loss of contact between the tires haust gas system, while driving. Contact and the road surface, ultimately undermin- with the exhaust gas system can cause ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi- burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not cle. touch the hot exhaust gas system, including the exhaust pipe.

235 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 236

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

Driving through water Objects in the area around the pedals

General information Warning When driving through water, follow the fol- Objects in the driver's floor area can limit lowing: the pedal distance or block a depressed – Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function. pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob- – Drive through calm water only. jects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's – Drive through water only if it is not floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm. for the vehicle and can be safely attached – Drive through water no faster than to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for Safety information the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re- NOTICE moved, for instance for cleaning. When driving too quickly through too deep water, water can enter into the en- Driving in wet conditions gine compartment, the electrical system or When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy the transmission. There is a risk of damage rain, gently press the brake pedal every few to property, among other potential dam- miles. age. When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum indicated water level Ensure that this action does not endanger and the maximum speed for driving other traffic. through water. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. Braking safely In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it. General information The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Hills Braking System ABS as a standard feature. Perform an emergency stop in situations General information that require such. Drive long or steep downhill gradients in Steering is still responsive. You can still the gear that requires least braking effort. avoid any obstacles with a minimum of Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re- steering effort. duce brake efficiency. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds You can increase the engine's braking effect from the hydraulic circuits indicate that the by shifting down, going all the way to first Antilock Braking System ABS is in its active gear, if needed. mode.

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 237

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

Safety information Ground clearance

Warning NOTICE Light but consistent brake pressure can If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g., lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing curbs or underground garage entrances, out and possibly even brake failure. There contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler, is a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces- and the underbody may occur. There is a sive stress on the brake system. risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance available. Warning In idle state or with the engine switched off, safety functions, for instance engine braking effect, braking assistance and Roof-mounted luggage rack steering assistance, may not be available. There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt General information to drive in idle state or with the engine Installation only possible with roof rack. switched off. Roof racks are available as special accessories. Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contami- Mounting nation on the brake pads are increased by Follow the installation instructions of the the following circumstances: roof rack. – Low mileage. – Extended periods when the vehicle is Loading not used at all. Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise – Infrequent use of the brakes. the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling – Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning and steering response. agents. Therefore, note the following when loading Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will and driving: cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their response - generally this cannot be – Do not exceed the approved roof/axle corrected. loads and the approved gross vehicle weight. Condensation water under the – Be sure that adequate clearance is main- parked vehicle tained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof. When using the automatic climate control, – Distribute the roof load uniformly. condensation water develops and collects underneath the vehicle. – The roof load should not extend past the loading area.

237 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 238

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

– Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom. – Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance using ratchet straps. – Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Driving on racetracks

Warning The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport or motor sport type competition. There is a risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type competitions.

Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. Use of the vehicle in M sport or motor sport type competition is an improper use of the vehicle and may affect your warranty cover- age. See “New Vehicle Limited Warranty” for more details.

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 239

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

Reducing fuel consumption

Vehicle features and options Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the fuel consumption. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available Close the windows and glass in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- sunroof tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. Driving with the glass sunroof and windows When using these functions and systems, open results in increased air resistance and the applicable laws and regulations must be raises fuel consumption. observed.

Tires General information General information The vehicle contains advanced technologies for the reduction of consumption and emis- Tires can affect consumption in various sion values. ways, for instance tire size may influence consumption. Fuel consumption depends on a number of different factors. Check the tire inflation pressure The implementation of certain measures, driving style and regular maintenance can regularly influence fuel consumption and environ- Check and, if needed, correct the tire infla- mental impact. tion pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling Remove unnecessary cargo resistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear. Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Drive away without delay

Remove attached parts follow- Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start ing use driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or This is the fastest way for the cold engine rear carriers which are no longer required to reach its operating temperature. following use.

239 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 240

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

Look well ahead when driving If the engine is switched off and then re- started rather than leaving the engine running constantly, fuel consumption and emis- Driving smoothly and proactively reduces sions are reduced. Savings can begin within fuel consumption. a few seconds of switching off the engine. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak- In addition, fuel consumption is also deter- ing. mined by other factors, such as driving By maintaining a suitable distance to the style, road conditions, maintenance or envi- vehicle driving ahead of you. ronmental factors.

Avoid high engine speeds Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear. Functions such as seat heating and the rear If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift window defroster require a lot of energy indicator, refer to page 136. and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic. Switch off these functions if they are not Use coasting conditions needed.

When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle Have maintenance carried out coast to a halt. For going downhill take your foot off the ac- Have the vehicle maintained regularly to celerator and let the vehicle roll. achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv- The fuel supply is interrupted while coast- ice life. MINI recommends that mainte- ing. nance work be performed by a MINI service center. Also note the MINI maintenance systems, Switch off the engine during refer to page 279. longer stops GREEN Mode Switching off the engine Switch off the engine during longer stops, for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross- Concept ings or in traffic jam. GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves on consumption. For this purpose, the Auto Start/Stop function engine control and comfort features, for instance the climate control output, are ad- The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle justed. automatically switches off the engine during a stop. For Steptronic transmission:

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 241

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

Under certain conditions the engine is auto- Via the Central Information Display matically decoupled from the transmission (CID) in the D selector lever position. The vehicle 1. "My MINI" continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce consumption. The D selector lever 2. "Vehicle settings" position remains engaged. 3. "Configure GREEN" In addition, context-sensitive instructions 4. Select the desired setting. are displayed to assist with an efficient driving style. Activating/deactivating the functions The achieved extended range is displayed in The following functions can be activated/ the instrument cluster as bonus range. deactivated: General information – "GREEN speed warning" The system includes the following MINI- – "GREEN climate control" MALISM functions and MINIMALISM dis- – "Coasting" plays: Settings are stored for the driver profile – GREEN Limit, refer to page 241 currently used. – GREEN climate control, refer to page 241. GREEN Limit – GREEN bonus range, refer to page 242. – "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit is activated. – GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to page 242. A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the set GREEN Limit is exceeded. – Coasting driving condition, refer to page 243. – "Tip at:" – MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to Set the desired speed for the GREEN page 245. Limit. Activating GREEN Mode GREEN climate control Climate control is set to be efficient. Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until By making a slight change to the set tem- GREEN is displayed in the in- perature and adjusting the rate of heating strument cluster. or cooling of the car's interior consumption can be economized. The power output to the seat heater and ex- Configuring GREEN terior mirror is reduced.

Via MINI Driving Modes switch Coasting 1. Activating GREEN Mode. Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the engine and coasting, refer to page 243, 2. "Configure GREEN" with the engine idling. 3. Select the desired setting. This function is only available in GREEN drive mode.

241 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 242

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

Deactivate the function to use the braking – Mark outside the green range: modify effect of the engine when traveling down- driving style, for example by backing off hill. the accelerator.

GREEN potential savings GREEN tip, driving instruction Shows potential savings with the current settings in percentages. General information The GREEN tip indicates that your driving Display in the instrument cluster style can be modified to be more efficient, for example by backing off the accelerator. GREEN bonus range A modified driving style helps Instrument cluster without enhanced you extend your driving dis- features: display tance. The range extension can be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument cluster. The bonus range is shown in the range display. The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled. – Green display: efficient driving style. – Gray display: modify driving style, for Instrument cluster with enhanced instance by backing off the accelerator features: display pedal.

Efficiency display A bar display in the instrument cluster indicates your current driving efficiency. Mark in the left area, arrow 1: display for energy recovered by coasting or when braking. Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display Activating/deactivating the display when accelerating. Activate information relating to the driving The efficiency of your driving style is style and GREEN tips in the instrument shown by the position of the mark: cluster using the Central Information Dis- – Mark inside the green range: efficient play (CID): driving style. 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings"

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 243

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

3. "Displays" – Coasting. 4. "Instrument panel" Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer 5. "GREEN info" Via the Central Information Display (CID): GREEN tip, symbols 1. "My MINI" An additional icon and text instructions are 2. "Technology in action" displayed. 3. "MINIMALISM Analyser" Icon Measure Further information on the MINIMALISM For an efficient driving style, look analyzer, refer to page 245. well ahead when driving, accelerate conservatively, and delay ac- Coasting celerating. Reduce speed to the selected Concept GREEN speed. The function helps to conserve fuel. To do this, under certain conditions the en- Steptronic transmission: gine is automatically decoupled from the Switch from M/S to D and avoid transmission when selector lever position D manual shift interventions. is set. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce consumption. Manual transmission: Selector lever position D remains engaged. Follow the shift instructions. This driving condition is referred to as coasting. Manual transmission: As soon as you step on the brake or acceler- Engage neutral for an engine stop. ator pedal, the engine is automatically cou- pled again. Indications on the Control Display General information Displaying MINIMALISM information Coasting is a component of the GREEN The current efficiency of the functions in drive mode. GREEN drive mode can be displayed on the Coasting is automatically activated when Control Display. the GREEN drive mode is called via the Via the Central Information Display (CID): MINI Driving Modes switch, refer to page 180. 1. "My MINI" A proactive driving style helps the driver to 2. "Technology in action" use the function often and supports the effi- 3. "MINIMALISM" cient effect of coasting. Information is shown on the following func- Functional requirements tions: The function is available in the speed range – Auto Start/Stop function. from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to – Energy recovery. 100 mph/160 km/h.

243 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 244

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

– Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are Instrument cluster with enhanced features not operated. – The selector lever is in selector lever position D. – Engine and transmission are at operating temperature. – With a camera in the area of the interior mirror: the system does not detect any vehicles ahead of you.

Operation via shift paddles The bar display below the tachometer is filled in green and the mark appears at the Concept zero point. The tachometer indicates idle Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the speed. coasting mode can be influenced with the shift paddles. Indications on the Control Display The coasting driving condition is displayed Activating/deactivating coasting via shift in the MINIMALISM Info while driving. paddles The distance traveled in the coasting driv- 1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the ing condition is indicated by a counter. right shift paddle. 2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the Displaying MINIMALISM information right shift paddle again. Via the Central Information Display (CID): To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle. 1. "My MINI" Display 2. "Technology in action" 3. "MINIMALISM" Instrument cluster without enhanced features System limits The function is not available if one of the following conditions applies: – DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated. – Cruise control is activated. – If driving in the dynamic limit range. – If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades. – The battery charge state is temporarily The bar display below the tachometer is fil- too low. led in green and the mark appears at the – The vehicle electrical system is drawing zero point. The tachometer indicates idle excessive current. speed.

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 245

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

MINIMALISM analyzer fish's mood worsens, and a reduced number of stars is displayed. Concept The table of values contains stars and evalu- The function helps develop an especially ef- ates the driving style in different catego- ficient driving style and to conserve fuel. ries. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are displayed in the table. For this purpose, the driving style is ana- lyzed. The assessment is done in various The bonus range achieved by a driving style categories and is displayed on the Control that minimizes consumption is displayed Display. below the table of values. The more efficient the driving style, the faster the bonus This display will help you adjust your driv- range increases. ing style and save some fuel. To assist with an efficient driving style, The range of the vehicle can be extended by GREEN tips are displayed while driving. adopting an efficient driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Sav- instrument cluster and on the Control Dis- ing fuel, refer to page 239. play.

Functional requirement This function is available in GREEN drive mode.

Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"

Display on the Control Display The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer consists of a fish in a water glass, a table of values and the display of the achieved bonus range. The fish and the movements of the water in the bowl symbolize the efficiency of the driving style. Depending on the equipment, the fish is shown with efficient and inefficient driving style or only with inefficient driving style. The more efficient the driving style, the less the water sloshes around in the bowl and the better is the fish's mood. If the driving style is inefficient, the water oscillates, the

245 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 246

MOBILITY Refueling

Refueling

Vehicle features and options Fuel cap

This chapter describes all standard, country- Opening specific and optional features offered with 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the the series. It also describes features and rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap functions that are not necessarily available opens. in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. page 248, prior to refueling.

Safety information

NOTICE With a driving distance of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at- damage to property, among other potential tached to the fuel filler flap. damage. Refuel promptly.

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 247

Refueling MOBILITY

Closing Safety information

Warning NOTICE The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling jammed and crushed during closing. The of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys- cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm or risk of damage to property. Pay atten- the environment. There is a risk of damage tion that the retaining strap is not jammed to property, among other potential dam- or crushed when closing the cap. age. Avoid overfilling.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. 2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages. Emergency unlocking It may be necessary in certain situations to unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with an electrical fault. Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the following when refueling

General information When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: – Premature switching off. – Reduced return of the fuel vapors. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly after refueling, otherwise the emissions warning light may light up. Follow safety regulations posted at the gas station.

247 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 248

MOBILITY Fuel

Fuel

Vehicle features and options xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

This chapter describes all standard, country- Safety information specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available NOTICE in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or tions or country versions. This also applies wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel to safety-related functions and systems. system and engine. Furthermore, the cata- When using these functions and systems, lytic converter is permanently damaged. the applicable laws and regulations must be There is a risk of damage to property, observed. among other potential damage. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines: Fuel recommendation – Leaded gasoline. – Metallic additives, for instance man- General information ganese or iron. Depending on the region, many gas stations Do not press the Start/Stop button after sell fuel that has been customized to winter refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a or summer conditions. Fuel that is available dealer’s service center or another qualified in winter, for instance helps make a cold service center or repair shop. start easier.

Gasoline NOTICE Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system General information and the engine. There is a risk of damage For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline to property, among other potential dam- should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur age. Do not use fuels with a higher per- content. centage of ethanol than recommended. Do Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as not refuel with fuels containing methanol, containing metal must not be used. e.g. M5 to M100. Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling. NOTICE Ethanol should meet the following quality Fuel that does not comply with the mini- standards: mum quality can compromise engine func- US: ASTM 4806–xx tion or cause engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx potential damage. Do not fill with fuel that

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 249

Fuel MOBILITY

does not comply with the minimum quality.

CAUTION The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi- tionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high alti- tude, may occur. If drivability problems are encountered, we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for additional maintenance.

Recommended fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 91. John Cooper Works: MINI recommends AKI 93. Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated performance and consumption values.

Minimum fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 89. John Cooper Works: MINI recommends AKI 91. If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

249 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 250

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options Tire pressure specifications

This chapter describes all standard, country- In the tire inflation pressure table specific and optional features offered with The tire inflation pressure table, refer to the series. It also describes features and page 251, contains all tire inflation pres- functions that are not necessarily available sure specifications for the specified tire in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire tions or country versions. This also applies inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes to safety-related functions and systems. approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle When using these functions and systems, for the vehicle type. the applicable laws and regulations must be To identify the correct tire inflation pres- observed. sure, please note the following: – Tire sizes of your vehicle. Tire inflation pressure – Maximum speed for driving. Checking the tire inflation pressure General information The tire characteristics and tire inflation General information pressure influence the following: Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla- – The service life of the tires. tion pressure increases with the tire tem- – Road safety. perature. – Driving comfort. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire inflation pressure. – Fuel consumption. The displays of inflation devices may under- Safety information read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi. Checking using tire inflation pressure Warning specifications in the tire inflation A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure table pressure may heat up significantly and The tire inflation pressure specifications in sustain damage. This will have a negative the tire inflation pressure table only relate impact on aspects of handling, such as to cold tires or tires at the same tempera- steering and braking response. There is a ture as the ambient temperature. risk of accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as Only check the tire inflation pressure levels needed, for instance twice a month and be- when the tires are cold, i.e.: fore a long trip. – Driving distance of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded. – If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip.

250 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 251

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires. 2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for example. 3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual tire inflation pressure deviates from the intended tire inflation pressure. These pressure values can also be found on 4. Check whether all valve caps are the tire inflation pressure label on the driv- screwed onto the tire valves. er's door pillar. After correcting the tire inflation Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/ pressure 160 km/h. For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires. Tire pressure values up to For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset 100 mph/160 km/h the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Checking the tire inflation pressure of COOPER ALL4 the emergency wheel Tire size Pressure specifica- Also check the tire inflation pressure of the tions in bar/PSI emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and correct it as needed. Specifications in bar/PSI with Tire pressures up to 100 mph/ cold tires 160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and 205/55 R 16 91 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32 for optimum driving comfort, note the pres- V A/S sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta- 225/45 R 17 91 ble, refer to page 251, and adjust as neces- V A/S sary. 205/55 R 16 91 W 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S

251 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 252

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifica- Tire size Pressure specifications tions in bar/PSI in bar/PSI 225/45 R 17 94 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35 225/40 R 18 2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38 Y XL 92 H XL A/S 225/40 R 18 92 225/40 R 18 Y XL 92 Y XL 225/40 R 18 92 235/35 R 19 H XL A/S 91 Y XL 195/60 R 16 89 195/55 R 17 H M+S 92 H XL M+S 195/55 R 17 92 225/40 R 18 H XL M+S 92 V XL M+S 225/40 R 18 92 205/45 R 18 2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39 V XL M+S 90 H XL M+S 235/35 R 19 91 2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38 Emergency Speed up to a max. of Y XL wheel 50 mph / 80 km/h 205/45 R 18 90 T 125/70 R 17 4.2 / 60 H XL M+S 98 M Emergency Speed up to a max. of wheel 50 mph / 80 km/h JOHN COOPER WORKS T 125/70 R 17 4.2 / 60 98 M Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4 Specifications in bar/PSI with Tire size Pressure specifications cold tires in bar/PSI

Specifications 225/40 R 18 2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38 in bar/PSI with 92 H XL A/S cold tires 225/40 R 18 92 Y XL 225/45 R 17 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35 235/35 R 19 91 V A/S 91 Y XL 225/45 R 17 225/40 R 18 94 Y XL 92 V XL M+S 225/45 R 17 205/45 R 18 2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39 91 H M+S 90 H XL M+S

252 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 253

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Tire inflation pressures at max. Tire pressure values over 100 mph/ speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 160 km/h

Warning COOPER ALL4 In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex- Tire size Pressure specifica- cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please ob- tions in bar/PSI serve, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/ Specifications in 160 km/h from the relevant table on the bar/PSI with following pages. Otherwise, tire damage cold tires and accidents could occur. 205/55 R 16 91 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35 For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for V A/S optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, 225/45 R 17 91 refer to page 253, and adjust as necessary. V A/S 205/55 R 16 91 W 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 94 Y XL 225/40 R 18 92 Y XL

253 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 254

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifica- COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4 tions in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications 225/40 R 18 92 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41 in bar/PSI H XL A/S 195/60 R 16 89 Specifications H M+S in bar/PSI with cold tires 195/55 R 17 92 H XL M+S 225/40 R 18 92 225/45 R 17 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41 V XL M+S 91 V A/S 235/35 R 19 91 225/45 R 17 Y XL 94 Y XL 205/45 R 18 90 225/45 R 17 H XL M+S 91 H M+S Emergency Speed up to a max. of 225/40 R 18 wheel 50 mph / 80 km/h 92 H XL A/S T 125/70 R 17 4.2 / 60 225/40 R 18 98 M 92 Y XL 235/35 R 19 91 Y XL 195/55 R 17 92 H XL M+S 225/40 R 18 3.2 / 46 3.2 / 46 92 V XL M+S 205/45 R 18 3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44 90 H XL M+S Emergency Speed up to a max. of wheel 50 mph / 80 km/h T 125/70 R 17 4.2 / 60 98 M

254 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 255

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

JOHN COOPER WORKS GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively. Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Speed letter Specifications in bar/PSI Designation Maximum speed with cold tires Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h R up to 106 mph/170 km/h 225/40 R 18 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41 S up to 112 mph/180 km/h 92 H XL A/S 225/40 R 18 T up to 118 mph/190 km/h 92 Y XL H up to 131 mph/210 km/h 235/35 R 19 V up to 150 mph/240 km/h 91 Y XL W up to 167 mph/270 km/h 225/40 R 18 3.2 / 46 3.2 / 46 92 V XL M+S Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h 205/45 R 18 3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44 90 H XL M+S Tire Identification Number DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0121 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand Tire identification marks xxx: tire size and tire design 0121: tire age Tire size Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines 205/45 R 17 84 V of the U.S. Department of Transportation. 205: nominal width in mm 45: aspect ratio in % Tire age R: radial tire code Recommendation 17: rim diameter in inches Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at 84: load rating, not for ZR tires least every 6 years. V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires Manufacture date Maximum tire load You can find the manufacture date of the Maximum tire load is the maximum permis- tire on the tire's sidewall. sible weight for which the tire is approved. Designation Manufacture date Locate the maximum tire load on the tire DOT … 0121 1st week 2021 sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on the certification label on the driver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating –

255 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 256

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Quality grades can be found where applica- characteristics. ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. Temperature E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera- The temperature grades are A, the highest, ture A B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to DOT Quality Grades dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Treadwear test wheel. Sustained high temperature can Traction AA A B C cause the material of the tire to degenerate Temperature A B C and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The All passenger vehicle tires must conform to grade C corresponds to a level of perform- Federal Safety Requirements in addition to ance which all passenger car tires must these grades. meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A Treadwear represent higher levels of performance on The treadwear grade is a comparative rating the laboratory test wheel than the minimum based on the wear rate of the tire when required by law. tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. E.g., a Warning tire graded 150 would wear one and one- half, 1 g, times as well on the government The temperature grade for this tire is es- course as a tire graded 100. The relative tablished for a tire that is properly inflated performance of tires depends upon the ac- and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un- tual conditions of their use, however, and derinflation, or excessive loading, either may depart significantly from the norm due separately or in combination, can cause to variations in driving habits, service prac- heat buildup and possible tire failure. tices and differences in road characteristics and climate. RSC – Run-flat tires Traction Run-flat tires, refer to page 259, are labeled The traction grades, from highest to lowest, with a circular icon containing the letters are AA, A, B, and C. RSC marked on the sidewall. Those grades represent the tire's ability to M+S stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern- Winter and all-season tires with better cold ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. weather performance than summer tires. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration,

256 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 257

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Tire tread likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz- Summer tires ards and reduce your speed, especially if Do not drive with a tire tread of less than your vehicle is equipped with low-profile 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in- tires. creased risk of hydroplaning. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle malfunctions: Winter tires – Unusual vibrations. Do not drive with a tire tread of less than – Unusual tire or running noises. 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter operation. – Unusual handling such as a strong ten- dency to pull to the left or right. Minimum tread depth Damage can be caused by the following situations, for instance: – Driving over curbs. – Road damage. – Tire inflation pressure too low. – Vehicle overloading. – Incorrect tire storage. Safety information Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re- Warning quired minimum height of 0.063 in- Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres- ches/1.6 mm. sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam- The positions of the wear indicators are age is suspected while driving, marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread immediately reduce speed and stop. Have Wear Indicator. wheels and tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s service center or another qualified service Tire damage center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair General information damaged tires, but have them replaced. Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Warning Driving over rough or damaged road surfa- Tires can become damaged by driving over ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta- obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at cles can cause serious damage to wheels, high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tires and suspension parts. This is more tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire

257 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 258

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

damage. There is a danger of accidents and property damage. If possible, avoid driving Warning over objects or road conditions that may Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will damage tires, or drive over them slowly have a negative impact on the vehicle's and carefully. handling and on the function of a variety of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Brak- ing System or DSC Dynamic Stability Con- trol. There is a risk of accident. To main- Changing wheels and tires tain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configu- Mounting and wheel balancing ration from a single manufacturer. The Have mounting and tire and wheel balanc- manufacturer of the vehicle recommends ing carried out by a dealer’s service center that you use wheels and tires that have or another qualified service center or repair been recommended by the vehicle manu- shop. facturer for your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehicle as Wheel and tire combination soon as possible. General information You can ask the dealer's service center or Recommended tire brands another qualified service center or repair shop about the correct wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for instance due to contact with For each tire size, the manufacturer of the the body due to tolerances despite the vehicle recommends certain tire brands. same official size rating. There is a risk of The tire brands can be identified by a star an accident. The manufacturer of your ve- on the tire sidewall. hicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for New tires your vehicle type. Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac- turing circumstances when tires are brand- new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

258 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 259

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Retreaded tires Rotating wheels between axles Different wear patterns can occur on the Warning front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated Retreaded tires can have different tire cas- in pairs between the axles to achieve even ing structures. With advanced age the wear. Further information is available from service life can be limited. There is a risk a dealer's service center or another qualified of an accident. The manufacturer of your service center or repair shop. After rotating, vehicle does not recommend the use of re- check the tire pressure and correct, if treaded tires. needed. The manufacturer of the vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires. Storing tires Winter tires Tire inflation pressure Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation Winter tires are recommended for operat- pressure indicated on the side wall of the ing on winter roads. tire. Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer Storage tires, they usually do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires. Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place. Maximum speed of winter tires Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents. If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the Do not leave tires in plastic bags. winter tires, then attach a label showing the Remove dirt from wheels or tires. permissible maximum speed in the field of view. The label is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service Run-flat tires center or repair shop. With winter tires mounted, observe and do Concept not exceed the permissible maximum speed. Run-flat tires permit continued driving un- Changing runflat tires der restricted conditions even in the event of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure. When changing from run-flat tires to standard tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle General information contains a compact spare tire ("donut") or tire mobility kit. Further information is The wheels are composed of tires that are available from a dealer's service center or self-supporting to a limited degree. another qualified service center or repair The support of the sidewall allows the tire shop. to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss. Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire.

259 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 260

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Safety information side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. Warning – If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance. The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are Mobility System longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive Concept moderately and do not exceed a speed of With the Mobility System, minor tire dam- 50 mph/80 km/h. age can be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the dam- Label age from the inside. General information – Follow the instructions on using the Mobility System found on the compressor and sealant container. – Use of the Mobility System may be inef- fective if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more. – Contact a dealer's service center or an- The tires are marked on the tire sidewall other qualified service center or repair with RSC Run-flat System Component. shop if the tire cannot be made drivable. – Do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign Repairing a flat tire objects if they are visibly protruding from the tire. Safety measures – Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steer- – Park the vehicle as far away as possible ing wheel. from passing traffic and on solid ground. – The use of a sealant can damage the – Switch on the hazard warning system. TPM wheel electronics. In this case, – Secure the vehicle against rolling away have the TPM wheel electronics re- by setting the parking brake. placed at the next opportunity. – Turn the steering wheel until the front – The compressor can be used to check wheels are in the straight-ahead posi- the tire inflation pressure. tion and engage the steering wheel lock. – Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out-

260 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 261

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Overview Safety measures – Park the vehicle as far away as possible Storage from passing traffic and on solid ground. The Mobility System is in a bag on the left – Switch on the hazard warning system. side of the cargo area. – Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake. Sealant container – Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock. – Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. – If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance. – Sealant container, arrow 1. Filling the tire with sealant – Filling hose, arrow 2. Observe use-by date on the sealant con- Safety information tainer. DANGER Compressor If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are color- less and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

1 Sealant container unlocking NOTICE 2 Sealant container holder The compressor can overheat during ex- 3 Tire pressure gage tended operation. There is a risk of dam- 4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button age to property, among other potential 5 On/off switch damage. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes. 6 Compressor 7 Connector/cable for socket 8 Connection hose

261 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 262

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Filling 4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con- 1. Shake the sealant container. tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel.

2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of the sealant container. Do not 5. With the compressor switched off, in- kink the hose. sert the connector into the power socket in the vehicle interior.

3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on the compressor housing, en- 6. With the ignition switched on or the en- suring that it engages audibly. gine running, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.

262 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 263

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Checking and adjusting the tire 4. Insert the connector into the power inflation pressure socket in the vehicle interior.

Checking 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire pressure gage. To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant container 5. With the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor. 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant If a tire inflation pressure of at least container from the tire valve. 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your 2. Press the red unlocking device. dealer's service center or another quali- 3. Remove the sealant container from the fied service center or repair shop. compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 4. Wrap and store the sealant container in 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla- suitable material to avoid dirtying the tion pressure is reached. cargo area. 6. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve. Minimum tire inflation pressure is not 7. Pull the connector out of the power reached socket in the vehicle interior. 1. Pull the connector out of the power 8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. socket in the vehicle interior. 2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to Minimum tire inflation pressure is distribute the sealant in the tire. reached 3. Screw the connection hose of the com- 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the pressor directly onto the tire valve stem. compressor from the tire valve. 2. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior. 3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. 4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

263 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 264

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Adjustment Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to 1. Stop at a suitable location. page 163. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to 2. Screw the connection hose of the com- page 158. pressor directly onto the tire valve stem. Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant container of the Mobility System promptly.

Tire chains

General information The manufacturer of the vehicle has determined certain wheels and tires to be suita- 3. Insert the connector into the power ble for operation on the vehicle. socket in the vehicle interior. Follow the tire chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting tire chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM after mounting tire chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with tire chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if 4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at needed. least 2.0 bar. – Increase tire inflation pressure: with Safety information the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the com- Warning pressor. With the mounting of tire chains on un- – Reduce tire inflation pressure: press suitable tires, the tire chains can come the button on the compressor. into contact with vehicle parts. There may 5. Unscrew the connection hose of the be a risk of accident or risk of damage to compressor from the tire valve. property. Only mount tire chains on tires 6. Pull the connector out of the power that are designated by their manufacturer socket in the vehicle interior. as suitable for the use of tire chains. 7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

264 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 265

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

immediately when there is a loss of tire in- Warning flation pressure due to a flat tire. Insufficiently tight tire chains may dam- If needed, the tools for changing wheels are age tires and vehicle components. There available as accessories from a dealer’s may be a risk of accident or risk of damage service center or another qualified service to property. Make sure that the tire chains center or repair shop. are always sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to the tire chain manu- Safety information facturer's instructions. DANGER Fine-link tire chains The vehicle jack is only provided for short- The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- term lifting of the vehicle for wheel mends the use of fine-link tire chains. Cer- changes. Even if all safety measures are tain types of fine-link tire chains have been observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi- tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. and recommended as road-safe and suitable. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the Information regarding suitable tire chains is vehicle and do not start the engine. available from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. DANGER Use Supports such as wooden blocks under the vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve- Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equip- hicle jack to bear weight. They have the ped with the tires of the following size: potential to exert too much strain on the – 195/60 R 16. vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the – 195/55 R 17. vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or – 205/45 R 18. danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle jack. John Cooper Works: 205/45 R 18. Warning Maximum speed with tire chains The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac- Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h turer, is provided in order to perform a when using tire chains. wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not designed for frequent use; for example, changing from summer to Changing wheels/tires winter tires. Using the jack frequently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. General information There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to attach an When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a emergency or spare wheel in the event of wheel does not always need to be changed a breakdown.

265 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 266

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Securing the vehicle against rolling Warning On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex- General information ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack The vehicle manufacturer recommends to can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If additionally secure the vehicle against roll- possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, ing away when changing a wheel. and slip-resistant surface. On a level surface

Warning The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.

Warning Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects When the vehicle jack is not inserted into in front and behind the wheel that is diago- the jacking point provided for this pur- nal to the wheel to be changed. pose, the vehicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk On a slight downhill gradient of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel housing.

Warning A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and If you need to change a wheel on a slight risk of damage to property. While the ve- downhill grade, place chocks and other suit- hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces able objects, for instance rocks, under the on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi- wheels of both the front and rear axles cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal- against the rolling direction. er’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Preparing the vehicle – Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from traffic. – Switch on the hazard warning system.

266 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 267

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

– Set the parking brake. 1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar- – Engage a gear or move the selector lever row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank to position P. or lever with your other hand, arrow 2. – As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. – Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle. – If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning light at an 2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan- appropriate distance. gular recess of the jacking point closest – Secure the vehicle additionally against to the wheel to be changed. rolling. – Loosen the lug bolts a half turn. Jacking points for the vehicle jack

3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the marked positions.

Jacking up the vehicle

Warning Hands and fingers can be jammed when 4. Take your hand away from the vehicle using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under injury. Comply with the described hand load and continue turning the vehicle position and do not change this position jack crank or lever with one hand. while using the vehicle jack.

267 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 268

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts stands vertically and at a right angle be- and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross- neath the jacking point. wise pattern. 5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely. After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm. 6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot 2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo stands vertically and perpendicularly be- area, if necessary. neath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack. The nonworking wheel cannot be stored under the cargo floor panel because of its size. 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed. 4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. 5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench. 6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the 7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle nearest dealer's service center or an- jack is with the entire surface on the other qualified service center or repair ground and the relevant wheel is maxi- shop. mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground. Mounting a wheel Emergency wheel Mount one emergency wheel only, as required. Concept 1. Unscrew the lug bolts. In the event of a flat tire, the emergency 2. Remove the wheel. wheel can be used in place of the wheel with the defective tire. The emergency 3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel wheel is only intended for temporary use on and screw in at least two lug bolts in until the defective tire/wheel has been re- a crosswise pattern until hand-tight. placed. If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the General information accompanying lug bolts may have to be used as well. Mount one emergency wheel only.

268 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 269

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Also check the tire inflation pressure of the 5. Remove the jacking point and the tool emergency wheel in the cargo area regu- holder on the left next to the emergency larly, and correct it as needed. wheel. 6. Slide the emergency wheel to the left Safety information and remove it.

Warning Inserting the emergency wheel The emergency wheel has particular di- 1. Insert the emergency wheel on the left mensions. When driving with an emer- and slide it to the right. gency wheel, changed driving properties 2. Where applicable, mount the holder and may occur, for instance reduced lane sta- the trailer hitch. bility when braking, longer braking dis- 3. Attach the retaining plate or the cover. tance, and changed self-steering properties in the limit area. There is a risk of 4. Screw on and tighten the butterfly accident. Drive moderately and do not ex- screw. ceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 5. Insert and secure the jacking point and the tool holder on the left next to the emergency wheel. Overview 6. Insert the cargo floor panel.

The emergency wheel and the wheel change tools are located in the cargo area under the cargo floor panel.

Removing the emergency wheel 1. Pull up and remove the cargo floor panel. 2. Unscrew the butterfly screw. 3. Remove the retaining plate or the cover. 4. Where applicable, remove the holder and the trailer hitch.

269 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 270

MOBILITY Engine compartment

Engine compartment

Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal 2 Vehicle identification number 5 Jump-starting, negative terminal 3 Oil filler neck 6 Coolant reservoir

270 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 271

Engine compartment MOBILITY

Hood Warning Safety information Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement Warning of the hood is clear during opening and Improperly executed work in the engine closing. compartment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to NOTICE property. Have work in the engine com- Folded-away wipers can be jammed when partment performed by a dealer’s service the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam- center or another qualified service center age to property, among other potential or repair shop. damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the Warning hood. The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move NOTICE with the vehicle switched off, for instance When the hood is closed, it must engage the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. on both sides. Pressing again can damage Do not reach into the area of moving parts. the hood. There is a risk of damage to Keep articles of clothing and hair away property, among other potential damage. from moving parts. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again.

Warning There are protruding parts, for instance Opening the hood locking hook, on the inside of the hood. 1. Pull lever, arrow 1. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is Hood is unlocked. open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.

Warning An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of accident. Stop immediately and correctly close the hood. 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened.

271 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 272

MOBILITY Engine compartment

Indicator/warning lights When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed. Closing the hood

Energetically close the hood from approx. 20 in/50 cm. The hood must engage on both sides.

272 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 273

Engine oil MOBILITY

Engine oil

Vehicle features and options Safety information

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with NOTICE the series. It also describes features and An engine oil level that is too low causes functions that are not necessarily available engine damage. There is a risk of damage in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- to property, among other potential dam- tions or country versions. This also applies age. Immediately add engine oil. to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. NOTICE Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a General information risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is The engine oil consumption is dependent on added, have the engine oil level corrected your driving style and driving conditions. by a dealer’s service center or another Therefore, regularly check the engine oil qualified service center or repair shop. level after refueling by taking a detailed measurement. The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations, for instance: Electronic oil measurement – Sporty driving style. – Break-in of the engine. General information – Idling of the engine. The electronic oil measurement has two – With use of engine oil types that are measuring principles: classified as not suitable. – Monitoring. Different Check Control messages appear, – Detailed measurement. depending on the engine oil level. When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, for instance when taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a detailed measurement.

273 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 274

MOBILITY Engine oil

Monitoring General information During the measurement, the idle speed is Concept increased somewhat. The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and can be shown on the Functional requirements Control Display. – Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi- If the engine oil level is outside its permis- tion. sible operating range, a Check Control mes- – Manual transmission: shift lever in neu- sage is displayed. tral position, clutch and accelerator ped- A red indicator light indicates that als not depressed. the engine oil pressure is too low. – Steptronic transmission: selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed. Functional requirements – Engine is running and is at operating A current measured value is available after temperature. approx. 30 minutes of normal driving. Performing a detailed measurement Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level" 3. "Engine oil level" 4. "Measure engine oil level" The engine oil level is displayed. 5. "Start measurement" System limits The engine oil level is checked and dis- When making frequent short-distance trips played via a scale. or using a dynamic driving style, it may not be possible to calculate a measured value. In this case, the measured value for the last, Adding engine oil sufficiently long trip is displayed. General information Detailed measurement Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The Concept quantity to be added is indicated in the The engine oil level is checked when the ve- message displayed in the instrument clus- hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale. ter. If the engine oil level is outside its permis- Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer sible operating range, a Check Control mes- to page 276. sage is displayed. Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition before adding engine oil. Take care not to add too much engine oil.

274 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 275

Engine oil MOBILITY

Safety information Adding engine oil 1. Open the hood, refer to page 271. Warning 2. Open the lid counterclockwise. Operating materials, for instance oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

3. Add engine oil. NOTICE 4. Close the lid. An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential dam- Engine oil types to add age. Immediately add engine oil. General information The engine oil quality is critical for the life NOTICE of the engine. Too much engine oil can damage the en- Only add the types of engine oil which are gine or the catalytic converter. There is a listed. risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is Safety information added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s service center or another NOTICE qualified service center or repair shop. Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not use Overview oil additives. The oil filler neck is located in the engine compartment, refer to page 270. NOTICE Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil rating.

275 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 276

MOBILITY Engine oil

Suitable engine oil types Engine oil change Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards: Gasoline engine NOTICE Engine oil that is not changed in timely BMW Longlife-01 FE. fashion can cause increased engine wear BMW Longlife-14 FE+. and thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. It is recommended BMW Longlife-17 FE+. that you do not exceed the service intervals indicated in the vehicle. Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use The vehicle manufacturer recommends that is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an you have a dealer's service center or an- engine oil with the following oil rating can other qualified service center or repair shop be added: change the engine oil. Oil rating API SL. API SM. API SN.

Viscosity grades When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil belongs to one of the following viscosity grades: Viscosity grades SAE 0W-20. SAE 0W-30.

More information about suitable oil ratings and viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

276 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 277

Coolant MOBILITY

Coolant

Vehicle features and options Warning This chapter describes all standard, country- Additives are harmful and incorrect addi- specific and optional features offered with tives can damage the engine. There is a the series. It also describes features and risk of injury and risk of damage to prop- functions that are not necessarily available erty. Do not allow additives to come into in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- contact with skin, eyes or articles of cloth- tions or country versions. This also applies ing. Use suitable additives only. to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Coolant level

Checking General information There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir. Coolant consists of water and additives. 1. Let the engine cool. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix addi- 2. Open the hood, refer to page 271. tives of different colors. Observe the water - 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information slightly counterclockwise to allow any about suitable additives is available from a excess pressure to dissipate, then open dealer’s service center or another qualified it. service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning With the engine hot and the cooling system open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.

277 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 278

MOBILITY Coolant

5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be- Disposal tween the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck. Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.

6. Close the lid.

Adding coolant 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Open the hood, refer to page 271. 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. 5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. 6. Close the lid. 7. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

278 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 279

Maintenance MOBILITY

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options General information Information on service notifications, refer This chapter describes all standard, country- to page 135, can be displayed on the Control specific and optional features offered with Display. the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available Service data in the vehicle key in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Information on the service notifications is tions or country versions. This also applies continuously stored in the vehicle key. The to safety-related functions and systems. service center can read this data out and When using these functions and systems, suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi- the applicable laws and regulations must be cle. observed. Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle key with which the vehicle was driven MINI maintenance system most recently. Storage periods The maintenance system provides service Storage periods during which the vehicle notifications and thereby provides support battery was disconnected are not taken into in maintaining road safety and the opera- account. tional reliability of the vehicle. If this occurs, have a dealer's service center In some cases, scopes and intervals of the or another qualified service center or repair maintenance system may vary according to shop update the time-dependent mainte- the country version. Replacement work, nance procedures, such as checking brake spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine materials are calculated separately. Further oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal information is available from a dealer's serv- filter. ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Maintenance Manual and Condition Based Service CBS Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models Concept and Warranty and Service Sensors and special algorithms take into ac- Guide Booklet for Canadian count the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses these to provide maintenance rec- models ommendations. The system makes it possible to adapt the Please consult your Maintenance Manual amount of maintenance corresponding to and Service and Warranty Information your user profile. Booklet for US models and Warranty and

279 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 280

MOBILITY Maintenance

Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Position for additional information on the performance of service and maintenance work. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diag- There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the nosis vehicle's emissions.

General information Emissions Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger the alarm system when the vehicle is – The warning light lights up: locked. Remove any devices connected at Emissions are deteriorating. the OBD socket before locking the vehicle. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. Safety information – The warning light flashes under certain circumstances: NOTICE This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine. The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in- tricate component intended to be used in Reduce the vehicle speed and have the conjunction with specialized equipment to system checked immediately; otherwise, check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys- serious engine misfiring within a brief tem. Improper use of the socket for On- period can seriously damage emission board Diagnosis, or contact with the control components, in particular the socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other catalytic converter. than its intended purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property damage. Given the fore- going, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for purposes of properly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

280 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 281

Replacing components MOBILITY

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options Wiper blades

This chapter describes all standard, country- Safety information specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available NOTICE in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- The window may sustain damage if the tions or country versions. This also applies wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade to safety-related functions and systems. installed. There is a risk of damage to When using these functions and systems, property, among other potential damage. the applicable laws and regulations must be Hold the wiper firmly when changing the observed. wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed. Vehicle tool kit NOTICE Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

The bag containing the onboard vehicle tool Replacing the front wiper blades kit is located beneath the cargo floor panel. 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper arms. After use, secure the bag with the onboard 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

281 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 282

MOBILITY Replacing components

3. Press button, arrow 1, and pull out the Light and bulb replacement wiper blade, arrow 2. General information

Lights and bulbs Lights and bulbs make an essential contri- bution to vehicle safety. Except for the side flashers and the lights in the rear bumper, all headlights and lights are designed in LED technology. 4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- blade must engage audibly. mends that you have appropriate work performed by a dealer’s service center or an- 5. Fold down the wiper arm. other qualified service center or repair shop if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not Replacing rear wiper blades been described here. 1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. A spare light box is available from a dealer's 2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back. service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Follow the safety information, refer to page 282.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are related to conventional lasers and are offi- cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting 3. Push the wiper blade out of the fasten- diodes. ing by continuing to turn it all the way. Follow the safety information, refer to 4. Insert the new wiper blade by following page 282. the steps in reverse order. The wiper blade must engage audibly. Safety information 5. Fold down the wiper arm. Lights and bulbs

Warning Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con- tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off.

282 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 283

Replacing components MOBILITY

Tail lights, bulb replacement Warning Work on switched-on lighting systems can Overview cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When working on the lighting system, switch off the lights in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is a risk of damage to property, 1 Tail lights in split doors among other potential damage. Do not hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use 2 Tail lights in bumpers a clean cloth or something similar, or hold 3 License plate light the bulb by its base. 4 Center brake light

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Tail lights in split doors, Union Jack All lamps in the split doors feature LED technology. Warning In the case of a malfunction, contact a deal- Intensive brightness can irritate or dam- er's service center or another qualified serv- age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of ice center or repair shop. injury. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources. Do not remove the LED covers. Tail lights in bumpers Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 282. Headlight glass In addition, the tail lights in the bumper as- Condensation can form on the inside of the sume the functions of the brake light, tail headlight glass in cool or humid weather. light and turn signals, if the split doors are When driving with the lights switched on, open. the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed. If despite driving with the headlights switched on, increasing humidity forms, for instance water droplets in the light, have the headlights checked.

283 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 284

MOBILITY Replacing components

Overview 4. Attach the screw driver handle with the slot to the blade, arrow 1.

1 Tail lights/brake lights/turn signal 2 Brake lights/turn signals 5. Loosen screw in the bumper, arrow 2. 6. Pull tail light from the bumper. Tail lights/brake lights/turn signal 21-watt bulbs, P21W. 1. Press out cover below the tail light.

7. Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise and remove nonworking bulb.

2. Remove the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit. 3. Pull the screwdriver blade from the handle and place it on the recessed-head screw head in the bumper.

8. To insert the new bulb and install the tail light, proceed in reverse order of removal. Make sure that the bulb holder sits tight in the tail light.

Central brake light and license plate lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 282.

284 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 285

Replacing components MOBILITY

The lights feature LED technology. In the 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's and remove. service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Side turn signal, bulb replacement Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 282. Bulbs: – With white lens: WY5W. 1. Open the hood. The covers of the side turn signal lights are on the left and 4. Replace the bulb. right next to the hinges of the hood. 5. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal. Insert the nuts of the cover and press down.

Vehicle battery

General information The battery is maintenance-free. 2. Loosen the nuts of the cover by hand or with the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer More information about the battery can be to page 281, and remove the cover. requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Safety information

DANGER Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

Warning Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that are compatible with your

285 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 286

MOBILITY Replacing components

vehicle type should be installed in your ve- There is a risk of damage to property, hicle. Information on compatible vehicle among other potential damage. Only con- batteries is available at your dealer’s serv- nect battery chargers for the vehicle bat- ice center. tery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment. Register the battery to the vehicle The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- Charging the battery mends that you have a service center or an- Charge the battery only when the engine is other qualified service center or repair shop off and via the starting aid terminals, refer register the vehicle battery to the vehicle to page 291, in the engine compartment. after the battery has been replaced. Once the battery has been registered again, all Power failure comfort features will be available without After a power loss, some equipment needs restriction and any Check Control messages to be newly initialized or individual settings displayed which relate to comfort features updated, for example: will disappear. – Memory function: store the positions Charging the battery again. – Time: update. General information – Date: update. Make sure that the battery is always suffi- – Glass sunroof: initialize the system. ciently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life. Disposing of old batteries A discharged battery is indicated by Have old batteries disposed of by a a red indicator light. dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair Charge the battery when acceleration is in- shop or take them to a collection point. sufficient. Maintain the filled battery in an upright po- The following circumstances can have a sition for transport and storage. Secure the negative effect on the performance of the battery so that it does not tip over during battery: transport. – Frequent short-distance drives. – The vehicle is not used for more than a month. Fuses Safety information Safety information

NOTICE Warning Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload which means that the 12 volt electrical electrical lines and components. There is a system can be overloaded or damaged. risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking

286 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 287

Replacing components MOBILITY

fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.

Accessing the fuses The fuses are located in the glove compartment. 1. Open the glove compartment. 2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations, as well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is available on the Internet: www.mini.com/fusecard. Where applicable, information on the fuse types and locations is also found on a separate sheet in the fuse box. Replacing fuses The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop replace the fuses.

287 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 288

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle features and options First-aid kit

This chapter describes all standard, country- General information specific and optional features offered with Some of the articles have a limited service the series. It also describes features and life. functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Check the expiration dates of the contents tions or country versions. This also applies regularly and replace any expired items to safety-related functions and systems. promptly. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be Storage observed. Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in the cargo area. Hazard warning flashers MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown. General information In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve- The button is located above the Control Dis- hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man- play. ufacturer. There are various ways of making contact. The red light in the button flashes when the – Via a Check Control message, refer to hazard warning flashers are activated. page 129. – Calling with a mobile phone. Warning triangle Requirements Depending on the equipment, the warning – Active MINI Connected contract or triangle is located in the cargo area under equipment version with intelligent the cargo area floor. emergency call. – Cellular network reception. – The ignition is switched on.

288 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 289

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

Starting Emergency Call If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, support is offered through Teleservice Diag- Intelligent emergency call nosis. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Concept 1. "MINI Connected" In case of an emergency, an emergency call can be triggered automatically by the sys- 2. "MINI Assist" tem or manually. 3. "MINI Roadside Assistance" The contact to the Roadside Assistance General information of the manufacture is established. Only press the SOS button in an emergency. A telephone number is displayed, if The Intelligent Assist system establishes a needed. Select to dial the telephone connection with the MINI Response Center. number on a connected mobile phone. For technical reasons, the Emergency Call cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable Teleservice Diagnosis conditions. Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that is Overview important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is transmitted automatically. Teleservice Help Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle via wireless transmission. You can launch Teleservice Help by re- questing it through the Service Specialist. 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. SOS button in the roofliner 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Control Display is switched on. Functional requirements – The ignition is switched on. 4. Confirm Teleservice Help. – The Assist system is functional. The driving ability of the vehicle can be restored for specific functions. – If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent emergency call: the SIM card If this is not possible, further measures will integrated in the vehicle has been acti- be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis- vated. tance will be informed. Automatic triggering Under certain conditions, for instance if the airbags trigger, an emergency call is automatically initiated immediately after an ac-

289 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 290

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

cident of corresponding severity. Automatic Jump-starting Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button. General information Manual triggering If the battery is discharged, the engine can 1. Press the cover briefly to open it. be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper 2. Press the SOS button until the LED at cables with fully insulated clamp handles. the button lights up green. – The LED is illuminated green when an Safety Instructions emergency call has been initiated. If the situation allows, wait in your vehi- DANGER cle until the voice connection has been established. Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of inju- – The LED flashes green when a connec- ries or danger to life. Do not touch any tion to the MINI Response Center has components that are under voltage. been established. The MINI Response Center then makes contact with you and takes further steps Warning to help you. If the jumper cables are connected in the Even if you are unable to respond, the incorrect order, sparking may occur. There MINI Response Center can take further is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor- steps to help you under certain circum- rect order during connection. stances. For this purpose, data that serves to determine the necessary rescue measures, for instance the current position of the NOTICE vehicle when it can be determined, is In the case of body contact between the transmitted to the MINI Response Cen- two vehicles, a short circuit can occur dur- ter. ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam- If you can no longer hear the MINI Re- age to property, among other potential sponse Center through the loudspeakers, damage. Make sure that no body contact the hands-free system, for instance, may occurs. be broken. However, the MINI Response Center may still be able to hear you. Preparation The MINI Response Center ends the emergency call. 1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage information can be found on the battery. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle. 3. Switch off any electrical components in both vehicles.

290 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 291

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

Starting aid terminals 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle The starting aid terminal in the engine com- and let it run for several minutes at an partment, refer to page 270, acts as the pos- increased idle speed. itive battery terminal. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. be started in the usual way. The body ground or a special connection on If the first starting attempt is not suc- the body in the engine compartment, refer cessful, wait a few minutes before mak- to page 270, acts as the negative battery ing another attempt in order to allow the terminal. discharged battery to recharge. 3. Let both engines run for several mi- Connecting the cables nutes. To prevent personal injury or damage to 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re- both vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow- verse order. ing procedure. Check the battery and recharge, if needed. 1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi- Tow-starting and towing tive jumper cable to the positive battery terminal, or to the corresponding start- Safety information ing aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance. Warning 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive battery Due to system limits, individual functions terminal, or to the corresponding start- can malfunction during tow-starting/ ing aid terminal of the vehicle to be towing with the Intelligent Safety systems started. activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega- prior to tow-starting/towing. tive jumper cable to the negative battery terminal, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehi- Steptronic transmission with cle. driven front axle: transporting the 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the vehicle negative battery terminal, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of General information the vehicle to be started. The vehicle must not be towed if the front Starting the engine wheels are touching the ground. Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

291 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 292

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

Safety information Steptronic transmission with ALL4: transporting the vehicle NOTICE The vehicle can be damaged when towing General information the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is The vehicle is not permitted to be towed. a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Have vehicle trans- Pushing the vehicle ported only with lifted front axle or on a To remove a broken-down vehicle from the loading platform. danger area, it can be pushed for a short distance. For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to NOTICE page 121. The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it. Tow truck There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. NOTICE – Lift the vehicle using suitable means. The vehicle can become damaged when – Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its lifting and securing it. tow fitting, body parts, or suspension There is a risk of damage to property, parts. among other potential damage. – Lift the vehicle using suitable means. Pushing the vehicle – Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its To remove a broken-down vehicle from the tow fitting, body parts, or suspension danger area, it can be pushed for a short parts. distance. For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 121.

Tow truck

The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

Manual transmission Your vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a Towing or pushing the vehicle flat bed. A broken-down vehicle can be towed or pushed.

292 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 293

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to Tow truck page 119. With driven front axle NOTICE If manual unlocking of the parking brake is not possible, the vehicle cannot be moved or towed. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

Follow the following instructions: – Make sure that the ignition is switched Your vehicle should be transported with a on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a turn signals, and wipers may be unavail- flat bed. able. – Do not tow the vehicle with the rear With ALL4 axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn. NOTICE – When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force The vehicle can be damaged when towing needs to be applied when braking and the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There steering. is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. The vehicle should – Larger steering wheel movements are only be transported on a loading platform. required. – The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle's response. – Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h. – Do not exceed a towing distance of 30 miles/50 km.

Have your vehicle transported on a flatbed surface only

Towing other vehicles

General information Switch on the hazard warning system, depending on local regulations.

293 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 294

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

If the electrical system has failed, clearly – Use nylon ropes or straps, which will en- identify the vehicle being towed by placing able the vehicle to be towed without a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win- jerking. dow. – Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening. Safety information – Check the fastening of the tow fitting and tow rope in regular intervals. Warning – Do not exceed a towing speed of If the approved gross vehicle weight of the 30 mph/50 km/h. towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle – Do not exceed a towing distance of to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or 3 miles/5 km. it will not be possible to control the vehi- – When starting to tow the vehicle, make cle's response. There is a risk of accident. sure that the tow rope is taut. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed. Tow fitting General information NOTICE If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incorrectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow bar The screw-in tow fitting should always be The tow fittings used should be on the same carried in the vehicle. side on both vehicles. The tow fitting can be screwed in at the Should it prove impossible to avoid mount- front or rear of the vehicle. ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol- The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool low the following: kit, refer to page 281, are together in the – Maneuvering capability is limited going cargo area. around corners. Use of the tow fitting: – The tow bar will generate lateral forces – Use only the tow fitting provided with if it is secured with an offset. the vehicle and screw it all the way in. – Use the tow fitting for towing on paved Tow rope roads only. Observe the following notes when using the – Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, tow rope: for instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

294 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 295

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

– Check the fastening of the tow fitting in Manual transmission regular intervals. If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to Safety information page 290. If the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter, only tow-start while the engine is cold. NOTICE If the tow fitting is not used as intended, 1. Switch on the hazard warning system there may be damage to the vehicle or to and comply with local regulations. the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage 2. Switch on the ignition, refer to to property, among other potential dam- page 102. age. Follow the notes on using the tow fit- 3. Engage third gear. ting. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch pedal pressed and slowly release Screw thread for tow fitting the pedal. After the engine starts, immediately press on the clutch pedal again. 5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or tow cable, and switch off the hazard warning system. 6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction of travel. Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out. Tow-starting

Steptronic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle. Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission. Have the reasons for the starting difficulties corrected by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

295 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 296

MOBILITY Care

Care

Vehicle features and options Distances and temperature – Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. This chapter describes all standard, country- – Minimum distance from sensors, cam- specific and optional features offered with eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm. the series. It also describes features and – Minimum distance from glass sunroof: functions that are not necessarily available 31.5 in/80 cm. in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies Automatic washing systems or car to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, washes the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Safety information

NOTICE Washing the vehicle Improper use of automatic washing systems or car washes can cause damage to General information the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to Regularly remove foreign objects such as property, among other potential damage. leaves in the area below the windshield Follow the following instructions: when the hood is raised. – Give preference to cloth car washes Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly or those that use soft brushes in or- in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can der to avoid paint damage. damage the vehicle. – Do not drive through a car wash with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to Steam jets or high-pressure avoid damage to the chassis. washers – Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims. Safety information – Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors. NOTICE – With rod antenna: unscrew the rod antenna to avoid rod antenna break- When cleaning with high-pressure wash- age. ers, components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too – Deactivate the wiper and, if neces- high. There is a risk of damage to property, sary, rain sensor to avoid damage to among other potential damage. Maintain the wiper system. sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pressure washer.

296 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 297

Care MOBILITY

Driving into a car wash with a manual Vehicle care transmission In car washes, the vehicle must be able to Vehicle care products roll freely. Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to General information page 119. MINI recommends using vehicle care and cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care Driving into a car wash with a products are available from a dealer’s serv- Steptronic transmission ice center or another qualified service cen- In car washes, the vehicle must be able to ter or repair shop. roll freely. Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to Safety information page 121. Some car washes do not permit persons in Warning the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked Cleansers can contain substances that are from the outside when in selector lever po- dangerous and harmful to your health. sition N. A signal is sounded when an at- There is a risk of injury. When cleaning tempt is made to lock the vehicle. the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning Driving out of a car wash vehicles. Follow the instructions on the Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. container. Start the engine, refer to page 103. Headlights Vehicle paint Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not General information use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. Regular care contributes to driving safety Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in- and value retention. Environmental influen- stance from insects, with shampoo and ces in areas with elevated air pollution or wash off with water. natural contaminants, such as tree resin or Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. ice scraper. Tailor the frequency and extent of your vehicle care to these influences. After washing the vehicle Corrosive substances such as spilled fuel, After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re- briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac- moved immediately to prevent the finish tion can be reduced. The heat generated from being altered or discolored. during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. Matte finish Completely remove all residues on the win- Only use cleaning and care products suita- dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to ble for vehicles with matte finish. smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

297 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 298

MOBILITY Care

Leather care Caring for special components Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Light-alloy wheels Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in- wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to creased wear and premature degradation of 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or the leather surface. steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the To guard against discoloration, such as from manufacturer's instructions. clothing, clean leather and provide leather Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning care roughly every two months. agents can destroy the protective layer of Clean light-colored leather more frequently adjacent components, such as the brake because soiling on such surfaces is substan- disc. tially more visible. After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt dry them. The heat generated during brak- and grease will gradually break down the ing dries brake discs and brake pads and protective layer of the leather surface. protects them against corrosion. Upholstery material care Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the ra- General information diator grille or door handles with plenty of water, if necessary, with shampoo added, Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a particularly when they have been exposed vacuum cleaner. to road salt. If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro- Rubber components fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Environmental influences can cause surface Clean the upholstery down to the seams us- soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing Use only water and suitable cleaning agents the material vigorously. for cleaning. Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub- Safety information ber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili- NOTICE con-containing vehicle care products in or- Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of der to avoid damage or noises. clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of damage to property, Fine wood parts among other potential damage. Ensure Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com- that any Velcro® fasteners are closed. ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

298 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 299

Care MOBILITY

Plastic components for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make NOTICE sure that there is sufficient clearance for Cleaning agents that contain alcohol or the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy- securely fastened again after they were re- duty grease removers, fuel and such, can moved, for instance for cleaning. damage plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential Floor mats can be removed from the car's damage. Clean with a microfiber cloth. interior for cleaning. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with needed. a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, Clean with a microfiber cloth. rub back and forth in the direction of travel Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if only. needed. Do not soak the roofliner. Sensor/camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a Safety belts cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent. Warning Displays/Screens/Projection lenses Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries NOTICE or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol- Chemical cleaning agents, moisture or flu- ution for cleaning the safety belts. ids of any kind can damage the surface of displays and screens. There is a risk of Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action damage to property, among other potential and thus have a negative impact on safety. damage. Clean with a clean, antistatic mi- Use only a mild soapy solution, with the crofiber cloth. safety belts clipped into their buckles. Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if they are dry. NOTICE The surface of displays can be damaged Carpets and floor mats with improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential Warning damage. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials. Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob- cloth. jects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's For stubborn soiling on the projection lens floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable of the Head-up Display, dampen the micro-

299 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 300

MOBILITY Care

fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, refer to page 144. Long-term vehicle storage When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

300 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 301

Care MOBILITY

301 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 302

REFERENCE Technical data

Technical data

General information The technical data and specifications in the values can be found in the approval docu- Owner's Manual are used as guidance val- ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob- ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate tained from a dealer’s service center or an- from this, for instance due to the selected other qualified service center or repair special equipment, country version or coun- shop. try-specific measurement method. Detailed

Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can model version, equipment or country-spe- deviate, for instance due to the selected cific measurement method. special equipment, tires, load and chassis The specified heights do not take into ac- version. count attached parts, for instance a roof an-

MINI Clubman Width with mirrors in/mm 79.4/2,018 Width without mirrors in/mm 70.9/1,800 Height in/mm 56.7/1,441 Length in/mm 168.5/4,281 Wheelbase in/mm 105.1/2,670 Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.1/11.3

302 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 303

Technical data REFERENCE

Weights

MINI Cooper S Clubman Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,266/1,935 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,343/1,970 Load Manual transmission lbs/kg 893/405 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 944/428 Approved front axle load Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,249/1,020 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,337/1,060 Approved rear axle load Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,138/970 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,172/985

MINI Cooper Clubman ALL4 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,431/2,010 Load lbs/kg 871/395 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,304/1,045 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,238/1,015

MINI Cooper S Clubman ALL4 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,519/2,050 Load lbs/kg 922/418 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,370/1,075 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,260/1,025

303 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 304

REFERENCE Technical data

MINI John Cooper Works Clubman ALL4 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,564/2,070 Load lbs/kg 917/416 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,414/1,095 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,271/1,030

Capacities

MINI Clubman Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 13.2/50.0

Observe further information on fuel quality, refer to page 248.

304 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 305

Appendix REFERENCE

Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

The following chapters were updated in the printed version of the Owner's Manual after the editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed: – Operation: opening and closing: vehicle key: safety Instructions. – Operation: opening and closing: vehicle key: change battery: note. – Operation: seats, mirrors and steering wheel: seats and head restraints: safety belts: general. – Mobility: wheels and tires: tire pressure: tire inflation pressure specifications: on the door pillar. In contrast to the description in the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, the MINI FindMate equipment is not available.

305 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 306

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z

Index A Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 ABS Antilock Braking System 178 Arrival time 141 Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Con- Ash tray 218 trol 124 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off Accessories and parts 8 assistant 181 ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 183 Assistance with breakdown 288 Activated charcoal filter 211 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Activation times, parked-car ventila- Entertainment and Communication 6 tion 212 Automatic car wash 296 Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based Automatic climate control 207 cruise control 183 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mir- Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 165 ror 93 Adaptive chassis 180 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen- Additives, engine oil types 275 ger airbags 156 Adjusting menu contents, Central Informa- Automatic headlight control 149 tion Display (CID) 40 Automatic locking 76 Adjustments, steering wheel 94 Automatic Recirculating Air Control 209 Airbags 154 Automatic transmission, see Steptronic Airbags, indicator and warning light 156 transmission 119 Air circulation, see Recirculated-air Automatic unlocking 76 mode 206 AUTO program, automatic climate con- Air conditioner 205 trol 209 air conditioning, climate 208 AUTO program, intensity 209 Air distribution, manual 206, 210 Auto Start/Stop function 105 Air drying, see air conditioning 208 Average consumption 140 Air flow, air conditioner 206 Average speed 140 Air flow, automatic climate control 210 Axle loads, approved 303 Air outlets, see Ventilation 211 Air pressure, tires 250 B Alarm system 77 Alarm triggering 77 Backrest curvature, see Lumbar sup- Alarm, unintentional 78 port 85, 86 ALL4 180 Backrest, seats 84 All-season tires, see Winter tires 259 Battery, disposing of 286 All-wheel drive, see ALL4 180 Battery, vehicle 285 Amazon Alexa Car Integration 46 Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow- Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 117 ing 291 Antilock Braking System ABS 178 Belts, see Safety belts 87 Anti-slip control, see DSC 178 Beverage holder, see Cup holders 226

306 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 307

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Blocking, power window, see Safety Car wash 296 switch 80 Car wash, automatic 296 Bluetooth connection 53 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas Bonus range, GREEN Mode 242 system 235 Bottle holder, see Cup holders 226 CBS Condition Based Service 279 Brake assistant 178 Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Brake discs, break-in 234 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Brake pads, break-in 234 Center armrest 225 Braking, information 236 Center console 34 Breakdown assistance 288 Central Information Display (CID) 36 Breaking in 234 Central Information Display (CID), see Con- Brightness, Control Display 49 trol Display 38 Bulb replacement 282 Central instrument cluster, LED ring 143 Bulb replacement, rear 283 Central locking system, unlocking, from in- Bulb replacement, side 285 side 68 Bulbs and lights 282 Central screen, see Control Display 38 Buttons on the steering wheel 32 Changes, technical, see For Your Own Button, SOS 289 Safety 7 Button, Start/Stop 102 Changing parts 281 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 290 Changing wheels 265 Changing, wheels and tires 258 C Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 220 California Proposition 65 Warning 8 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wire- Calling up mirror adjustment 76 less charging tray 220 Calling up seat adjustment 76 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel- number 13 ligent Safety 165 Check Control 129 Camera-based cruise control 183 Check engine oil level 273 Camera lenses, care 299 Checking the engine oil level electroni- Camera, rearview camera 196 cally 273 Can holder, see Cup holders 226 Checking the oil level electronically 273 Care 296 Children, seating position 96 Care, light-alloy wheels 298 Children, transporting safely 96 Care of displays, screens 299 Child restraint system 96 Care, vehicle 297 Child restraint system LATCH 99 Cargo area 228 Child restraint systems, mounting 97 Cargo area, adapting size 233 Child safety locks 101 Cargo area door, see Split doors 72 Child seat, mounting 97 Cargo area, enlarging 231 Child seats 96 Cargo area, storage compartments 230 Chrome parts, care 298 Cargo cover 230 Cigarette lighter 218 Cargo position, rear seat backrest 231 Cleaning displays, screens 299 Cargo, stowing and securing 228 Clearance, water 236 Cargo straps 229 Climate control 205, 207 Carpet, care 299 Clothes hooks 226

307 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 308

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Coasting 243 Cruise control without distance control, see Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coast- Cruise control 190 ing 243 Cruising range 135 Coasting with idling engine 243 Cup holder 226 Combination switch, see Turn signals 110 Current consumption 135 Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys- Customer service, see Owner's Manual for tem 110, 114 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Comfort Access 68 tion 6 Compartments in the doors 225 Compass 216 D Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 53 Damage, tires 257 Computer, see Trip computer 139 Dashboard 32 Condensation on windows 207, 210 Data memory 10 Condensation under the vehicle 237 Data protection, settings 51 Condition Based Service CBS 279 Data, see Deleting personal data 51 Configuring driving program 181 Data, technical 302 Confirmation signal 77 Date 48 Connect device 52 Date, display 135 Connecting electrical devices, see Sock- Daytime running lights 150 ets 218 DCC, see Cruise control 190 Connections 52 Defrosting, see Windows, defrost- Consumption, see Average consump- ing 207, 210 tion 140 Deleting personal data 51 Consumption, see Current consump- Departure schedule, see Pre-ventilation 135 tion 211 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Destination distance 141 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Device list 52 Continued driving with a flat tire 161, 164 Digital clock 134 Control Display 38 Digital compass 216 Control Display, brightness 49 Dimensions 302 Controller 39 Dimmable exterior mirrors 93 Control systems, driving stability 178 Dimmable interior mirror 94 Convenient closing, vehicle key 64 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 110 Convenient opening, vehicle key 63 Display, date 135 Cooling, maximum 208 Display, electronic, instrument clus- Cornering light 150 ter 128, 129 Corrosion on brake discs 237 Display, engine temperature 140 Cosmetic mirror 218 Display, GREEN Mode 240 Coupling, see Pairing 52 Display, iDrive 36 Courtesy lights during unlocking 63 Display lighting, see Instrument light- Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 64 ing 152 Cruise control 190 Displays 126 Cruise control, active 183 Disposal, coolant 278 Cruise control with distance control, see Disposal, vehicle battery 286 Camera-based cruise control 183 Distance control, see PDC 193

308 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 309

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Distance to destination 141 Emergency braking, see PostCrash - Divided screen view, split screen 38 iBrake 177 Drive-off assistant 181 Emergency Request 289 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 178 Emergency service, see MINI Roadside As- Driver assistance, see Intelligent sistance 288 Safety 165 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 247 Driver profiles 73 Emergency unlocking, transmission Driver profiles, exporting profiles 75 lock 123 Driver profiles, importing profiles 75 Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv- Emergency wheel 268 ing Modes switch 180 Energy control 135 Driving Excitement, SPORT 142 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 105 Driving instructions, breaking in 234 Engine compartment 270 Driving mode, GREEN 240 Engine coolant 277 Driving mode, GREEN Driving style analy- Engine idling when driving, see Coast- sis 245 ing 243 Driving modes 180 Engine oil 273 Driving notes, general 235 Engine oil, adding 274 Driving notes, things to remember when Engine oil change 276 driving 234 Engine oil filler neck 274 Driving on racetracks 238 Engine oil types to add 275 Driving stability control systems 178 Engine start, see Jump-starting 290 Driving, Start/Stop button 102 Engine start, see Starting the engine 103 Driving style analysis 245 Engine stop 104 Driving through water 236 Engine temperature, display 140 Driving tip, GREEN tip 242 Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand- Driving tips 235 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- DSC Dynamic Stability Control 178 munication 6 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 179 Entering an address, navigation, see Own- DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav- er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 and Communication 6 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chas- Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Nav- sis 180 igation, Entertainment and Communica- Dynamic Stability Control DSC 178 tion 6 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 179 Equipment, interior 213 Error displays, see Check Control 129 E ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 178 Easy Opener 70 Exchanging, wheels and tires 258 Electronic displays, instrument clus- Exhaust gas system 235 ter 128, 129 Exhaustion warner 176 Electronic oil measurement 273 Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 235 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Moni- DSC 178 tor 93 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea- tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 ture 93

309 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 310

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Exterior mirrors 92 Fuel filler flap 246 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 93 Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 247 External start, see Jump-starting 290 Fuel gauge 133 External temperature display 134 Fuel quality 248 External temperature warning 134 Fuel recommendation 248 Eyes for securing cargo 229 Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 304 Fuse 286 F G Failure message, see Check Control 129 False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer- alarms 78 sal Remote Control 213 Fan, see Air flow 206, 210 Gasoline 248 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 87 Gear shift indicator 136 Fatigue alert 176 General driving notes 235 Filler neck for engine oil 274 General settings 48 Filter, see Microfilter 207 Glare shield 218 Fine wood, care 298 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 83 First-aid kit 288 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun- Fish, MINIMALISM display 245 roof 81 Flat tire, changing wheels 265 Glove compartment 224 Flat tire, continued driving 161, 164 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 49 Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 163 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Flat tire message, FTM 163 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Flat tire message, TPM 159 tion 6 Flat Tire Monitor TPM 163 GREEN bonus range 242 Flat tire, repairing 260 GREEN Mode 240 Flat tire, warning light 159, 163 GREEN - program, driving dynamics 180 Flooding, driving through 236 GREEN tip, driving tip 242 Floor carpet, care 299 Gross vehicle weight, approved 303 Floor mats, care 299 Ground clearance 237 Fold-away position, windshield wipers 113, 116 H Foot brake 236 Forward Collision Warning with collision Handbrake, electric, see Parking brake, mitigation 166 electric 108 For Your Own Safety 7 Hand-held transmitter, alternating Front airbags 154 code 214 Front fog lights 151 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de- for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- activation 156 cation 6 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator Hazard warning flashers 288 light 157 Head airbag 155 Front seats 84 Headlight control, automatic 149 Fuel 248 Headlight flasher 110 Fuel cap 246

310 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 311

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Headlight glass 283 Indicator and warning lights, see Check Headlights, care 297 Control 129 Head restraints and seats 84 Indicator light, front-seat passenger air- Head restraints, front 89 bags 157 Head restraints, rear 90 Indicator light, see Check Control 129 Head-up Display 144 Individual air distribution 206, 210 Head-up Display, shift point indicator 147 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 73 Head-up Display, sport displays 146 Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wire- Head-up Display, standard view 145 less charging tray 220 Head-up Display, store position, see Mem- Inflation pressure, tires 250 ory function 91 Inflation pressure warning TPM, tires 163 Heated steering wheel 94 Info Display 128 Heavy cargo, stowing 228 Information 6 Height, vehicle 302 Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 163 High-beam Assistant 150 Input, iDrive 36 High beams 110 Instrument cluster 126 High beams/low beams, see High-beam As- Instrument cluster, electronic dis- sistant 150 plays 128, 129 Hills 236 Instrument lighting 152 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis- Integrated key 67 tant 181 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi- Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 226 cle 60 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Integrated Universal Remote Control 213 Control 213 Intelligent emergency call 289 Homepage, see Internet 6 Intelligent Safety 165 Hood 271 Intended use 8 Horn 32 Intensity, AUTO program 209 Hot exhaust gas system 235 Interior equipment 213 HUD Head-up Display 144 Interior lights 152 Hydroplaning 235 Interior lights during unlocking 63 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 64 I Interior mirror 92 Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea- iBrake - PostCrash 177 ture 94 Ice warning, see External temperature Interior mirror, compass 216 warning 134 Interior mirror, manually dimmable 93 Icy roads, see External temperature warn- Interior motion sensor 78 ing 134 Interval display, service notifications 135 Identification marks, tires 255 Interval mode 111, 115 Identification number, see Vehicle identifi- In the vicinity of the center console 34 cation number 13 In the vicinity of the roofliner 35 Ignition off 102 Ignition on 102 J Illuminated ring, central instrument cluster 143 Jacking points for the vehicle jack 267 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 82

311 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 312

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Jam protection system, windows 80 Locking, automatic 76 Jump-starting 290 Locking, from inside 68 Locking, settings 75 K Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As- sistant 150 Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 68 Low beams, operation 148 Key, see Integrated key 67 Lower back support, see Lumbar sup- Key, see Vehicle key 62 port 85, 86 Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 121 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage Knee airbag 155 rack 237 Lumbar support 85, 86 L M Label on recommended tires 258 Lane departure warning 172 Maintenance 279 Lane threshold, warning 172 Maintenance recommendations, see Condi- Language, set 48 tion Based Service CBS 279 Lashing eyes 229 Maintenance, service notifications 135 LATCH child restraint fixing system 99 Maintenance system, MINI 279 Launch Control 124 Make-up mirror 218 Leather care 298 Malfunction displays, see Check Con- LED ring, central instrument cluster 143 trol 129 LEDs, light-emitting diodes 282 Manual air flow 206 Length, vehicle 302 Manual brake, electric, see Parking brake, Letters and numbers, entering 37 electric 108 Light-alloy wheels, care 298 Manual control, air distribution 206, 210 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 282 Manual control, air flow 210 Lighter 218 Manual mode, transmission 122 Lighting 148 Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con- Light replacement 282 trol 194 Light replacement, rear 283 Manual operation, rearview camera 197 Light replacement, side 285 Manual Speed Limiter 174 Lights 148 Manual transmission 118 Lights and bulbs 282 Manufacturer of the MINI 7 Light switch 148 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav- LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 174 igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 List, instrument cluster, see Selection Matt paint, care 297 lists 138 Maximum cooling 208 List of all messages 50 Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit Load 229 Info 137 Loading 228 Maximum speed, winter tires 259 Loading position 231 Measuring units 49 Loading the cargo area, see Stowing Mechanical key 67 cargo 228 Media of the Owner's Manual 60 Location, vehicle position 49 Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 288 Memory function 91

312 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 313

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints lists 138 rear 90 Menus, Central Information Display Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels, (CID) 40 care 298 Messages 50 New wheels and tires 258 Messages, see Check Control 129 Notifications 50 Microfilter 207, 211 No-touch opening the split doors 70 MID - program, driving dynamics 180 MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for O Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- tion 6 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 280 MINI driving modes 180 OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 280 MINI logo projection during unlocking 63 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 198 MINI maintenance system 279 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel MINIMALISM analyzer 245 grade 249 MINIMALISM information 243 Odometer 134 Minimum tread, tires 257 Oil 273 MINI Roadside Assistance 288 Oil, adding 274 Mirrors 92 Oil change 276 Mobile communication devices in the vehi- Oil filler neck 274 cle 235 Oil service interval, service notifica- Mobile phone, connecting 52 tions 135 Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Oil types to add, engine 275 gation, Entertainment and Communica- Onboard literature, printed 60 tion 6 Onboard vehicle tool kit 281 Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assis- On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assis- tance 288 tance 288 Mobility System 260 Opening and closing 62 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Opening, from inside 68 Safety 7 Operating concept Central Information Dis- Moisture in headlight 283 play (CID) operating concept 36 Monitor, see Control Display 38 Operating menus, Central Information Dis- Mounting of child restraint systems 97 play (CID) 36 MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Operation via the Controller 40 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Operation via touchscreen 42 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32 Operation via voice 44 Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Optional equipment, see Vehicle equip- tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 ment 7 Outside air, see Automatic Recirculating N Air Control 209 Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor- Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- age 300 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Owner's Manual, printed 60 Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints front 89

313 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 314

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

P R

Paint, car care 297 Racetrack operation 238 Pair device 52 Radio-ready state 103 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 78 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Panic mode 78 Entertainment and Communication 6 Panoramic glass sunroof 81 Rain sensor 111, 115 Parallel parking assistant 199 Ratchet straps 229 Park Distance Control PDC 193 Rear lights 283 Parked vehicle, condensation 237 Rear seat backrests, folding down 231 Parking aid, see PDC 193 Rearview camera 196 Parking assistant 199 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 92 Parking brake, electric 108 Rear window defroster 207, 210 Parking lights 148 Rear window wiper, operation 112, 116 Parts and accessories 8 Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/acti- Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down, vated-charcoal filter 211 see Automatic Curb Monitor 93 Recirculated-air mode 206 Pathway lighting 149 Recommended fuel grade 249 Pathway lines, rearview camera 197 Recommended tire brands 258 Payload, technical data 303 Refueling 246 PDC Park Distance Control 193 Remaining range 135 Pedestrian Collision Warning with City Col- Remote control, universal 213 lision Mitigation 170 Remote services, app, see Owner's Hand- Performance Control 180 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- Personal data, deleting 51 munication 6 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 73 Replacing parts 281 Phone, connecting 52 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 65 Plastic, care 299 Replacing, wheels and tires 258 PostCrash - iBrake 177 Reporting safety malfunctions 14 Power failure 286 RES CNCL button, camera-based cruise con- Power windows 79 trol 183 Pressure, tires 250 RES CNCL button, cruise control 190 Pre-ventilation 211 Reserve warning, see Range 135 Printed onboard literature 60 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 159 Profiles, see Driver profiles 73 Retreaded tires 259 Programmable memory buttons, Central In- Roadside parking lights 149 formation Display (CID) 43 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 214 Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam RON recommended fuel grade 249 protection system 82 Roofliner 35 Protective function, windows, see Jam pro- Roof-mounted luggage rack 237 tection system 80 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 39 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- cation 6 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Rubber components, care 298

314 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 315

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Run-flat tire 259 Smallest turning circle, vehicle 302 Smartphone, connecting 52 S Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navi- gation, Entertainment and Communica- Safe braking 236 tion 6 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 280 front passenger seat 89 Sockets, electrical devices 218 Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 89 Software update 58 Safety belts 87 Software, updating 58 Safety belts, care 299 SOS button 289 Safety locks, doors, and windows 101 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Safety switch, windows 80 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Safety systems, see Airbags 154 tion 6 Saving fuel 239 Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 268 Screen, see Control Display 38 Speech recognition 44 Screwdriver 281 Speed Limit Device, see Speed Limiter 174 Sealant, see Mobility System 260 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Seat heating, front 87 Info 137 Seating position for children 96 Speed Limiter 174 Seats and head restraints 84 Speed Limit Info 137 Seats, front 84 Speed Limit Info, trip computer 141 Securing, cargo 228 Speed limit, see Speed Limiter 174 Selection list in the instrument cluster 138 Speed, see Average speed 140 Sensors, care 299 Speed warning 143 Service and warranty 9 Split doors 72 Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assis- Split doors, opening with no-touch activa- tance 288 tion 70 Service notifications, display 135 Split doors via vehicle key 64 Service notifications, see Condition Based Split screen 38 Service CBS 279 Sport displays 142 Servotronic 182 Sport displays, Head-up Display 146 SET button, camera-based cruise con- SPORT program, driving dynamics 181 trol 183 Sport program, transmission 121 SET button, cruise control 190 Stability control systems 178 Setting, Control Display 49 Standard equipment, see Vehicle equip- Settings, general 48 ment 7 Settings, locking/unlocking 75 Standard view, Head-up Display 145 Settings, mirrors 92 Stars, MINIMALISM display 245 Settings, seats and head restraints 84 Start/stop, automatic function 105 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 123 Start/Stop button 102 Shift point indicator, Head-up Display 147 Starting the engine 103 Side airbag 154 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook Signaling, horn 32 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- Signals when unlocking 77 cation 6 Sitting safely 84 Status control display, tires 158 Slide/tilt glass roof 81

315 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 316

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Status information, Central Information Dis- Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for play (CID) 37 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Status of Owner's Manual 7 tion 6 Status, vehicle 147 Temperature, air conditioner 205 Steering assistance 182 Temperature, automatic climate con- Steering column adjustment 94 trol 208 Steering wheel, adjusting 94 Temperature display for external tempera- Steering wheel, buttons 32 ture 134 Steptronic Sport transmission, see Step- Temperature, engine 140 tronic transmission 119 Terminal, starting aid 291 Steptronic Sport transmission with double Text message, Check Control 133 clutch, see Steptronic transmission 119 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 77 Steptronic transmission 119 Thigh support 87 Steptronic transmission with double clutch, Third-party provider, voice assistant 46 see Steptronic transmission 119 Through-loading system 231 Stopping the engine 104 Tilt alarm sensor 78 Storage compartments 224 Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror, Storage, tires 259 see Automatic Curb Monitor 93 Store Mirror position, see Memory func- Time 48 tion 91 Time of arrival 141 Store seat position, see Memory func- Tire brands, recommended 258 tion 91 Tire chains 264 Storing the vehicle 300 Tire damage 257 Stowing, cargo 228 Tire identification marks 255 Suitable devices 53 Tire inflation pressure 250 Suitable mobile phones 53 Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see Summer tires, tread 257 TPM 163 Sun visor 218 Tire inflation pressure monitor TPM 163 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 60 Tire pressure 250 Supplementary text message 133 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 158 Switches, see Dashboard 32 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 260 Switch for driving dynamics 180 Tires 250 Symbols 6 Tires, changing 258 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 260 T Tires, run-flat 259 Tire tread 257 Tachometer 134 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Tailgate, see Split doors 72 Entertainment and Communication 6 Tail lights 283 Tools 281 Tank capacity 304 Touchscreen 42 Technical changes, see For Your Own Towing 291 Safety 7 Tow-starting 291 Technical data 302 TPM Flat Tire Monitor 163 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 158 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Traction control 179

316 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 317

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control, Vehicle battery 285 DTC 179 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis- Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for tance 288 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Vehicle, breaking in 234 tion 6 Vehicle care 297 Transmission lock, electronic unlock- Vehicle care products 297 ing 123 Vehicle equipment 7 Transmission, manual transmission 118 Vehicle identification number 13 Transmission, see Steptronic transmis- Vehicle jack 267 sion 119 Vehicle key, additional 65 Transporting children safely 96 Vehicle key, loss 65 Travel computer 141 Vehicle key, malfunction 66 Tread, tires 257 Vehicle key, opening/closing 62 Trip computer 139 Vehicle key, replacing the battery 65 Triple turn signal activation 110 Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 62 Trip odometer 134 Vehicle paint, care 297 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 134 Vehicle position, vehicle location 49 Trunk, see Cargo area 228 Vehicle status 147 Turning circle, vehicle 302 Vehicle storage 300 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 197 Vehicle washing 296 Turn signal, indicator light 132 Ventilation 211 Turn signal, side 285 Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 211 Turn signals, operation 110 Venting, see Ventilation 211 Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 283 Vent, see Ventilation 211 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13 U Voice assistant, third-party provider 46 Voice command response 44 Unintentional alarm, avoiding 78 Voice control 44 Units, see Measuring units 49 Voice control system 44 Universal remote control 213 Unlocking, automatic 76 W Unlocking, settings 75 Updates made after the editorial deadline 7 Warning and indicator lights, see Check Updating, software 58 Control 129 Upholstery care 298 Warning displays, see Check Control 129 Upper retaining strap, top tether 100 Warning messages, see Check Control 129 USB connection 55 Warning triangle 288 USB port, position in vehicle 219 Warranty 8 Used battery, disposing of 286 Washer fluid 117 Use, intended 8 Washer nozzles, windshield 112, 116 Using a smartphone via voice control 46 Washer system 110, 114 Washing the vehicle 296 V Washing, vehicle 296 Water on roads 236 Vanity mirror 218 Website 6 Weights 303

317 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 Seite 318

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Welcome lights 149 Welcome lights during unlocking 63 Wheel base, vehicle 302 Wheels 250 Wheels, changing 258 Width, vehicle 302 Windows, powered 79 Windshield defroster 207, 210 Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 117 Windshield washer nozzles 112, 116 Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 110, 114 Windshield wipers, fold-away position 113, 116 Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle storage 300 Winter tires, suitable tires 259 Winter tires, tread 257 Wiper blades, replacing 281 Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 117 Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 110, 114 Wiper system 110, 114 Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wire- less charging tray 220 Wireless charging tray for smartphones 220 Wood, care 298 Word match concept, navigation 37 Working in, engine compartment 271 Wrench 281

318 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 01405A2C181 ue *BL5A2C181003*

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21

California Proposition 65 Warning For vehicles sold in California:

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21 MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app. Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.

01405A2C181 ue *BL5A2C181003*

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C181 - II/21